Panasonic DMR BS850 User Manual To The 36d93724 838f 42a0 817c B99d23f84257
User Manual: Panasonic DMR-BS850 to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 124
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Operating Instructions
Blu-ray Disc Recorder
Model No.
DMR-BS850
DMR-BS750
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.
≥This Blu-ray Disc recorder is equipped with a Common Interface. It can receive encrypted and free-to-air DVB-S/S2 services.
≥The tuner in this unit is only compatible with DVB-S/S2.
Region management information
BD-Video
This unit plays BD-Video marked with labels containing the region code B.
Example:
DVD-Video
This unit plays DVD-Video marked with labels containing the region number “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2
ALL
2
3
5
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
RQT9434-L
EG
until
2010/02/15
Quick Start
Guide
1 ページ
Basic
operations
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
Getting
started
Getting
started
2 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Characteristics of this unit
Record with High Definition
EPG
It is possible to record in high definition quality
when the broadcast is high definition.
>7
Timer recording is made easier because the TV
Guide allows you to see programme information.
> 23
WED, 27.05.2009
Landscape
3 KiKa
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
All DVB Channels
All Types
Time: 23:00
23:30
0:00
0:30
1:00
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
1 ZDF
Bruder
Frankfurt
2 3 sat
Valley
News
3 KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
4 ZDFinfok
Wandern im Wald
Ökosystem Savanne
Sonderberichte
5 ZDFdokuk Planète insolite
6 ZDFtheat
PLATINUM/MARS
Hier ist die Familie
7 DKULTUR
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Select Channel
Page Up
OK
Info
OPTION
Page Down CH
Select Programme
GUIDE Change display mode
RETURN
-24 hours
+24 hours
Prog. Type
Category
Easy access to various functions
You can access the main function quickly and
easily from FUNCTION MENU display.
> 13
≥FUNCTION MENU display
FUNCTION MENU
Blu-ray
Play all Video
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music
TV Guide
Copy
View
Others
SD
Blu-ray Disc / DVD
SD Card
USB
ZDF
KiKa
3 sat
3 sat
RETURN
ZDF
Select a
function.
PLAY
RETURN
HDD
Social/Economi
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Berge und Flüsse
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Wirtschafts-News
Soccer Digest
S
B
O
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed)
Start Time 22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)
29.10(Wed) Die Rückkehr der Zombies
ZDFdokuk
29.10(Wed) Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
KiKa
29.10(Wed) Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
KiKa
DV
01.01(Thu) DV 21.02.02
Page 001/002
OPTION
Previous
Next
Select
Edit Title
Delete Title
Network Connection
VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”
You can access a selection of Internet services
from the Home screen with VIERA CAST.
You can also playback the video in the HDD of this
unit from DLNA compatible equipment on the
same network.
≥Enjoying VIERA CASTTM (> 78)
≥DLNA feature (> 79)
DLNA compatible
equipment
It is possible to record 2 programmes being
broadcasted at the same time by connecting two
satellite cables.
> 31
You can access
selected function
easily.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Titles)
Titles recorded to HDD can be viewed, All
Not Viewed
Movie
edited, or deleted.
OK
2 programmes Simultaneous Recording
Internet
Operation of this unit can be controlled by the
remote control of the TV (VIERA) by connecting
with the HDMI cable to the TV (VIERA).
≥Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/
Q Link) (> 76)
≥Pause Live TV (> 79)
VIERA
DIGA
DIGA
About descriptions in these operating instructions
≥These operating instructions are applicable to models DMR-BS850 and DMR-BS750. The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show
images of DMR-BS850 unless otherwise indicated.
[BS850]: indicates features applicable to DMR-BS850 only.
[BS750]: indicates features applicable to DMR-BS750 only.
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “> ±±”.
RQT9434
2
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
3 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of September 2009. These may be subject to change.)
∏
∏
Getting
started
Included accessories
∏
(N2QAYB000338)
1
Remote control
2
Batteries
for remote control
∫ The remote control information
Batteries
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
1
AC mains lead
For use with this unit only. Do not use it with
other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other equipment with
this unit.
Use
Remote control signal sensor
20
R6/LR6, AA
≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
30
20
30
7 m directly in front of the unit
The distance and angles are an approximate.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
RQT9434
3
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
4 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Table of contents
Advanced timer recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Getting started
Getting started
Characteristics of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Included accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Quick Start Guide
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Regarding Blu-ray Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Recording high definition programmes and copying . . . . . . . . . . . 7
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
USB memories you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cards you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Control reference guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Easy access to various functions
— FUNCTION MENU display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card) . . . . . . . . 15
Inserting discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inserting, removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inserting, removing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Disc and card care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
STEP 1 Inserting the CAM
(Conditional Access Module) and Smart Card . . . . . . 16
STEP 2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus
(Common Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Basic operations
Watching digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video/
Playing recorded video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Playing recorded video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Recording television programmes [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
To specify a time to stop recording
—One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Timer Recording using the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Deleting during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Advanced watching digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
To show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Switching audio of the TV broadcast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
To select content in the digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
To show Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Title
Recording
Advanced recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Recording method and disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Recording modes and recording contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2 programmes simultaneous recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Types of recording data for copyright protected titles . . . . . . . . . 31
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operation during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
RQT9434
4
Manually programming timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
To release the unit from timer recording standby. . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
To cancel recording when timer recording
has already begun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
TV Guide data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Playing back
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Display the subtitle during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Display the Teletext during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play
—DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Switching of the Navigator [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Playback the title that was viewed once [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
To change the Genre Label [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
To edit the group of titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Playback of the High Definition Video (AVCHD) . . . . . . 43
Playback of the playlist created
on other equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playing DivX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
To enjoy the BD Video which supports
BONUSVIEW or BD-Live [BD-V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Playing secondary video (picture-in-picture)
and secondary audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Enjoying BD-Live discs with Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
To enjoy High Bit Rate Audio and Video . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enjoying High Bit Rate Audio with 7.1ch speaker . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Regarding 24p output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Editing
Editing titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Title operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Create Chapter Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Editing and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Chapter operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Copying
Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Copying using the copying list—Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
With Other Equipment
Recording broadcasts from external equipment . . . . . 59
Recording from Set Top Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Linked timer recordings with external equipment (Set Top Box)
— EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Copying from a video equipment
(video cassette recorder, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format)
or the SD Video (MPEG2 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Copying new still pictures on the SD card
—Copy New Pictures ( JPEG ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory
—Copy All Pictures ( JPEG ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Music
Music
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
DVB Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
HDD / Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
70
70
71
72
Software (firmware) Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Editing music/playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Playing MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Album and track operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register track to Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playlist operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
73
74
74
74
Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Copying music from a disc or a USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Others
Convenient functions
Linked operations with the TV
(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link). . . . . . . . . . . .76
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
TM
Enjoying VIERA CAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
To pause the TV programme you are watching
—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
DLNA feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Playing back from
Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Playing back from
non-Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Convenient functions to playback and
viewing or listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Update software (firmware) of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional Access Module)
software (firmware) update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Quick Start
Guide
Basic
operations
Editing still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Still pictures operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Recording
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
HOLD function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . 100
Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Connecting VCR or Set Top Box
(Terrestrial receiver, CATV, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . 101
Connecting with an HDMI compatible
television and receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Network connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Editing
Playing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Copying
Still pictures
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Deleting all titles—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Delete BD-Video data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Enabling the unit’s recording function—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Finalising—Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Reference
Operations that can be performed
simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Operations that can be performed while
recording or copying a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Starting of the timer recording while executing
other operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
When removing a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
115
118
120
122
With Other
Equipment
Still pictures
Playing
back
Disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Getting
started
午後４時２１分
Still pictures
木曜日
Music
２０１０年１月１４日
Convenient
functions
5 ページ
Reference
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
RQT9434
5
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
Quick Start
Guide
6 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
HDD and disc information
This unit can record or copy to the following HDD or discs.
Internal
DVD-RAM
BD-RE
HDD
+R
BD-R
DVD-R
+R DL
DVD-R DL DVD-RW
+RW
You can record the programme of the digital broadcast to the HDD by using this unit’s tuner.
Recording by pressing [¥ REC] button
It can only record to HDD by pressing [¥ REC] in DR mode (> 29).
HDD
REC
Timer recording
It can only record to HDD when using timer record.
WED, 27.05.2009
Landscape
3 KiKa
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
All Types
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
All DVB Channels
HDD
Time: 23:00
23:30
0:00
0:30
1:00
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
1 ZDF
Bruder
Frankfurt
2 3 sat
Valley
News
3 KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
4 ZDFinfok
Wandern im Wald
Ökosystem Savanne
Sonderberichte
5 ZDFdokuk Planète insolite
6 ZDFtheat
PLATINUM/MARS
Hier ist die Familie
7 DKULTUR
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Select Channel
Page Up
OK
CH
Info
OPTION
Page Down
Select Programme
GUIDE Change display mode
RETURN
-24 hours
+24 hours
Prog. Type
Category
≥Discs can be recorded from the external equipment. Discs that can be recorded will differ depending on the recording method.
For details, please refer to “Recording method and disc” on page 29.
Regarding Blu-ray Disc
1.High volume recording
The Blu-ray Disc (BD-RE and BD-R) has a lot more recording capacity compared with the DVD.
When you compare the Blu-ray Disc (single-side dual-layer 50 GB) with the DVD-R (4.7 GB)
Blu-ray Disc
(50 GB: single-side dual-layer)
DVD-R (4.7 GB)
About 10 DVD-Rs
When a 2 hour movie is recorded (in SP mode)
About 10 movies
About 1 movie
(per 1 DVD disc)
2.High quality recording
Blu-ray Disc can record the image of the digital broadcasting in the same quality as broadcasted. Therefore, high definition quality can be
recorded as high definition quality as it is.
Blu-ray Disc
Broadcasted images can be recorded as they are
(When recorded in DR mode)
DVD-R, etc.
Broadcasted images cannot be recorded as they are
RQT9434
6
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
7 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Recording high definition programmes and copying
Quick Start
Guide
This unit will record the high definition quality programmes§1 of the digital broadcast onto the HDD with high quality image and audio as it was
broadcasted. Perform the copy using an appropriate disc and recording mode for your purpose.
Goal!
Programmes in high definition (HD) quality
Recording
HDD
DR mode
Goal!
≥Record as high definition (HD) quality
≥All subtitles, multiple audio and Teletext are
recorded.
COPY
Copy as it was broadcasted
BD-R
BD-RE
DR mode
When copying titles to disc
≥Quality and speed of copy depends on the type of
disc being used.
Copy in high definition for a long time§2
BD-R
BD-RE
HG, HX, HE, HL mode§2
Copy in standard definition
All Discs
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode
Goal!
≥Copy as high definition (HD) quality
≥Copy in High Speed mode
≥All subtitles, multiple audio and
Teletext are copied.
§1
§2
§3
§4
≥Copy as high definition quality with
compressed broadcast data.
≥Copy in Normal Speed mode
≥Only one subtitle can be copied.§3
≥Only one audio can be copied for the multiple
audio.
≥Teletext can be copied. [Copy Title Playing
only (> 55)]§4
≥Copy as standard definition (SD) quality
≥Copy in Normal Speed mode
≥Only one subtitle can be copied.§3
≥Only one audio can be copied for the multiple
audio.
≥Teletext can be copied. [Copy Title Playing only
(> 55)]§4
It will also record standard definition programmes of the digital broadcast with the same quality of image and audio as broadcasted.
Data size of the copied title may be larger than the original title, depending on the transfer rate.
It is recommended to use HE or HL mode when you record high definition and long programmes.
You cannot switch the subtitle on or off during the playback of the copied title.
You cannot operate the Teletext during the playback of the copied title. (> 28)
RQT9434
7
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
8 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
HDD and disc information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Disc type
Hard disk drive (HDD)
Standard symbol
[HDD]
Data that can be recorded and played
Quality in which video is recorded
Video/Still picture/Music
High definition (HD) quality/Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode in which video is recorded
DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
Rewritable
≤
Timer recording
≤
Recording of copyright protected titles (> 31)
≤
Disc type
Standard symbol
Data that can be recorded and played
Quality in which video is recorded
BD-RE
BD-R
(50 GB/25 GB)
(50 GB/25 GB)
[BD-RE]
[BD-R]
Video/Still picture
Video
High definition (HD) quality/Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode in which video is recorded
Rewritable
DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
≤
–
Timer recording
–
Recording of copyright protected titles (> 31)
≤
Play on other players
It can be played on the players compatible with BD-RE (Ver. 2.1) and BD-R.
≥BD-RE and BD-R that were recorded on this unit may not be played on other Blu-ray Disc
players, etc. Also, when programmes broadcasted in countries (France, New Zealand, etc.)
adopting the HE-AAC audio format are recorded in the DR mode, Blu-ray Disc Players
incompatible with the HE-AAC may not output audio recorded onto BD-RE or BD-R disc on this
unit while playback may be possible with those players. To playback titles recorded in DR mode
on this unit, please convert the recording mode. (> 32, 50)
≥Playback of LTH type BD-R discs may not be possible with players that do not support the LTH
type format.
≥Single-side dual-layer (50 GB) disc can only be played on the compatible player.
Note
≥DL is also included.
≥DL is also included.
“DL” is a single-side dual-layer disc.
“DL” is a single-side dual-layer disc.
≥BD-RE (Ver. 1.0) with a cartridge cannot be
≥LTH type is also included.
used with this unit. (It cannot be used even if it ≥For BD-R finalised with this unit or other
is taken out from the cartridge)
equipment, only playback is possible on this
Use the BD-RE compliant to Blu-ray Disc
unit.
Rewritable Format Version 2.1.
≥Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.
RQT9434
8
9 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Disc type
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
Standard symbol
[RAM]
[-R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
Data that can be recorded and
played
DVD-R DL
[-R]DL] before finalisation [-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
Video
Still picture
Video
Quality in which video is recorded
Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode in which video is
recorded
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
≤
Rewritable
≤
–
Timer recording
Recording of copyright protected
titles (> 31)
DVD-RW
–
≤
CRPM (> 118)
compatible discs only.
–
Play on other players
[RAM] can be played back ≥Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment.
on Panasonic DVD
≥[-R]DL] can be played back only on equipment compatible with this disc.
recorders and DVD-RAM
compatible DVD players.
Note
Take the disc out from the
cartridge to use the DVDRAM with a cartridge.
(TYPE1 cannot be used)
–
Disc type
+R
+R DL
+RW
Standard symbol
[+R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[+RW]
Data that can be recorded and
played
Video
Quality in which video is recorded
Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode in which video is
recorded
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
Rewritable
Quick Start
Guide
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
≤
–
Timer recording
–
Recording of copyright protected
titles (> 31)
–
Play on other players
≥Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment.
≥[+R]DL] can be played back only on equipment compatible with this
disc.
Note
≥[+R] [+R]DL] recorded with this unit or with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible.
However, discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.
≥8X Speed +RW disc is not supported.
≥[+RW] can be played back only on
equipment compatible with this
disc.
≥If the disc failed to play on other
equipment, we recommend you
create top menu (> 86).
≥Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.
[Note]
≥Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be used for recording on this unit.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.)
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥Recording-restricted or copy-restricted programmes may not be recorded depending on the type of discs (including HDD) or recording mode.
∫ Regarding 8 cm Disc
This unit cannot record or edit the 8 cm BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R DL or +RW.
Only playback or copy to the HDD is possible.
RQT9434
9
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
10 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
HDD and disc information
Play-only discs
Disc type
Logo
Standard symbol
[BD-V]
BD-Video
Uses
High Definition (HD) movie and music discs
≥This unit can playback BONUSVIEW or BD-Live compatible discs.
(> 46)
≥When playing a set of two or more BD-Video discs, the menu screen
may continue to display even if the disc has been ejected.
≥To enjoy High Bit Rate Audio and Video (> 47)
≥Operation of this unit may become slower when the BD-J application
(> 118) is executing. This is not malfunction.
[DVD-V]
DVD-Video
[-RW‹VR›]
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DivX®, MP3,
JPEG
[CD]
CD
Disc with high
definition
video (AVCHD)
recorded by
Panasonic’s
video camera,
etc.
–
DivX®, MP3,
JPEG
–
[AVCHD]
Movie and music discs
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
≥By formatting (> 85) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with video recorded in DivX
≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with music recorded in MP3
≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG
≥Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)
≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with video recorded in DivX
≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with music recorded in MP3
≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG
Following disc can be played.
≥BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW
≥Only the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R or +R DL which was
finalised (> 118) with the same equipment that was used to record
can be played.
≥Set “Play Video ( AVCHD ) on BD-RE / BD-R” to “On” for the disc that
has high definition video (AVCHD) recorded by Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. and high definition quality title that was recorded on this
unit. (> 89)
§
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Discs that cannot be played
≥BD-RE (Ver.1.0)
≥DVD-RAM that cannot be removed from their cartridges
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalised (> 118).
≥BD-Video with a region code other than “B”
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”
≥DVD-Audio
≥HD DVD
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD, SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, Video CD, etc.
RQT9434
10
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
11 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
USB memory and card information
USB memories you can use on this unit
Compatible USB memories
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class and digital camera that use PTP
protocol:
– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
≥Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not
supported.
≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
Format
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Indicated in these instructions
by
[USB]
Data that can be played
DivX, MP3, Still pictures (JPEG)
Data that can be copied
MP3
≥It can be copied to HDD.
Quick Start
Guide
USB memories can only be used for playback or copy to HDD or discs.
Still pictures (JPEG)
≥It can be copied to HDD, BD-RE or DVD-RAM.
Standard Definition (SD) Video (MPEG2 format)
High Definition (HD) Video (AVCHD format)
≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 63)
≥HD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R. (> 62)
≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
[Note]
≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
Cards you can use on this unit
SD cards can be used for playback, copy to HDD or discs or copy from HDD or discs.
Type
SD Memory Card§1 (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
SDHC Memory Card§2 (from 4 GB to 32 GB)
§1 Including miniSD Card and microSD Card
§2 Including miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.
Indicated in these instructions
by
[SD]
Data that can be played
Still pictures (JPEG)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
Data that can be copied
Still pictures (JPEG)
≥It can be copied to/from HDD, BD-RE or DVD-RAM.
Standard Definition (SD) Video (MPEG2 format)
High Definition (HD) Video (AVCHD format)
≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 63)
≥HD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R. (> 62)
Instructions
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
≥A miniSD Card, a miniSDHC Card, a microSD Card and microSDHC Card must be used with the adaptor
that comes with the card.
Suitable SD cards
≥When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display the SDHC logo can be used.
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
(This site is in English only.)
≥If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you
may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (> 85, 118).
≥This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in
FAT32 format.
≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory
Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
∫ Setting the protection
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
LOCK
RQT9434
11
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
12 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on or off (> 18)
2 Select drive (HDD, BD or SD) (> 21)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers or
characters (The character buttons may be used when operating
VIERA CAST contents.)
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 25, 37)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Show digital channel information (> 27)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 38)/Show status messages (> 83)
7 Selection/OK, Select station from Channel List (> 20)/Frame-byframe (> 40)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR, Top menu, Pop-up Menu (> 21)
9 Show OPTION menu (> 48, 66, 73)
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,
etc.
: Skip the specified time (> 40)
; Colour buttons
Use in accordance with instruction on the screen.
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 22)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 59)
= Show teletext (> 28, 40)
> Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 27)
? Transmit the remote control signal
@ Television operations (> 99)
A Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 22, 38)
B Show VIERA CAST (> 78)
C Input select (TV, AV1, AV2, AV3 or DV) (> 20, 22, 59, 60)
D Show Timer Recording screen (> 35)
E Exit the menu screen
F Show the TV Guide screen (> 20, 38)
G Show FUNCTION MENU window (> 13)
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the
main functions (playback, recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
H Return to previous screen
I Create chapter (> 51)
J Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 40)
K Direct TV Recording (> 76)
L EXT LINK function (> 59)
M Show on-screen menu (> 81)
N Select audio (> 27, 40)
TV
VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
AV
PAGE
2abc 3def
1
4ghi 5jkl 6mno
CH
7pqrs 8 tuv 9wxyz
INPUT PROG/CHECK
SELECT
0
DEL
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
PAUSE
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
OK
OPTION
ION ME NU
NC T
FU
DIRE CT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
TEXT
STTL
AUDIO DISPLAY
Main unit
RQT9434
12
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 18)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
2 Disc tray (> 15)
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (> 60)
4 Blue LED
≥It is possible to set the LED to turn on/off. (> 92)
5 Display (> 13)
6 Recording indicator
7 Remote control signal sensor
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
Pull to flip down the front
panel.
Connection for VCR, Panasonic’s video camera, etc. (> 60)
Open/close disc tray (> 15)
SD card slot (> 15)
USB port (> 15)
Channel select (> 20)
Start recording (> 22)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 22)
Stop (> 22, 39)
Start play
Rear panel terminals (> 17, 100–103)
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
13 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
The unit’s display
Quick Start
Guide
EXT-L COPY
HDDSD
BD
SD USB
PLAY
1 SD card slot indicator
This indicator lights up when an SD card is inserted.
2 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
3 Copying indicator
4 Disc indicator
This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted.
5 Drive (HDD, BD or SD) indicator
Select “BD” for any discs. BD indicator will light up.
6 Remote control signal indicator
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
7 Main display section indicator
Current time/playback counter, various messages
8 Playback indicator
9 USB port indicator
This indicator lights up when a USB memory is inserted.
: Timer recording indicator
This indicator lights up when the timer recording standby is
activated.
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU display
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Play all Video (> 21)
≥The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
Play Video ( AVCHD ) (> 41)
FUNCTION MENU
Blu-ray
Play all Video
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music
TV Guide
Copy
View
Others
SD
Blu-ray Disc / DVD
SD Card
USB
Play Pictures ( JPEG ) (> 64)
Play Music (> 71)
BD-RE
Play Video
Playlists
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Blu-ray Disc Management
Copy (> 26)
Select for playback of disc and formatting of disc etc.
View (> 20)
TV Guide (> 23)
≥“View” is displayed when this unit is connected with the TV that
supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 76)
OK
RETURN
Others
Timer Recording (> 35)
Ext Link Standby (> 59)
Flexible Recording via AV input (> 61)
OK
OK
DV Automatic Recording (> 61)
Network (> 78)
Select an item.
Press [OK].
≥You can access the main functions via either the above
operations or repetition of the above operations.
Setup (> 87)
Blu-ray Disc / DVD
SD Card
USB
Select an operation that can be executed with media such as
discs, SD cards, or USB devices.
≥There are operations that cannot be performed when recording or
when there is no media inserted. Those items are disabled for
selection in such cases.
RQT9434
13
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
14 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ Setup precautions
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
≥Do not place on anything that
DO NOT
generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
This unit
≥Place in an area where condensation
VCR
does not occur. Condensation is a
phenomenon where moisture forms on a
cold surface when there is an extreme
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal
damage to the unit.
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when
subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly
impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is
subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of the
HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
– During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor, etc.
gets inside the unit.
∫ While operating
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD
may become damaged.)
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for
a short time.)
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the Lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
DO NOT
The heat can damage the unit.
[Note]
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is
empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
RQT9434
14
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
15 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)
Inserting discs
Disc and card care
∫ How to hold a disc or card
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
DO
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Disc With a Cartridge
≥BD-RE with a cartridge cannot be used with this unit.
(It cannot be used even if it is taken out from the cartridge)
≥Remove the DVD-RAM or 8 cm disc from the cartridge and
place it on the tray. (TYPE1 cannot be used)
Refer to the instructions on how to remove the disc from the
cartridge.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
Inserting, removing the USB memory
Inserting the USB memory
When the USB indicator (“USB”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
USB memory is being read from. Do not turn off the unit or remove
the USB memory. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of
the USB memory’s contents.
≥Before inserting any USB memory to this
unit, ensure that the data stored therein
has been backed up.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB” screen is
displayed. Select an item and press [OK]
to switch to the USB-related operations (> 62, 63).
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
DO
DO NOT
∫ Handling precautions
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and unbalanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
shapes.
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
Inserting, removing the SD card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or
remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the
card’s contents.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
Inserting the card
Press on the centre of
the card until it clicks
into place.
DO NOT
Quick Start
Guide
Insert label-up.
If you are using a
miniSD card, a
miniSDHC card, a
e.g.,
microSD card or a
microSDHC card, insert miniSD
it into the adaptor that
comes with the card.
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
DO NOT
≥Do not place in the following areas:
– In direct sunlight.
– In very dusty or humid areas.
– Near a heater.
– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a
problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no
responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent
damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a Blu-ray
Disc Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this
unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a Blu-ray Disc Recorder or
computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played
in this unit.
ADAPTER
Insert the card label up with the cut-off corner on the right.
Removing the card
1 Press on the centre of the card.
2 Pull it straight out.
RQT9434
15
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
16 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
STEP 1 Inserting the CAM (Conditional Access Module) and Smart Card
You need a Conditional Access Module together with a valid Smart Card and a subscription with the corresponding broadcaster.
1 Insert the certified Smart Card into the commercially available CAM (Conditional Access Module).
2 Insert the CAM into the CI (Common Interface) slot of this unit.
TV service encryption is automatically cancelled and the service can be viewed or recorded.
≥You can insert one or two different CAMs with Smart Cards into this unit.
However, it will not operate properly when two CI Plus compatible CAMs are simultaneously inserted.
CI (Common Interface) slot
This unit’s rear panel
CAM (Conditional Access Module)
VIDEO
1
2
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
AC IN
Y
L
PB
R
PR
COMMON INTERFACE
LNB
IN 1
13V/18V
400mA max.
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
Smart Card
AV2
(EXT)
LNB
IN 2
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
Adjust the position marks.
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
Label facing upwards
∫ PIN query
When you turn the unit on after inserting the card, depending on the card provider, a PIN may be demanded.
Enter the 4-digit code with the numbered buttons.
[Note]
≥Be sure to insert the CAM horizontally into the slot.
≥Do not insert the CAM and Smart Card upside down.
≥For more details, see the manual of the CAM and Smart Card, or consult the dealer.
≥The Common Interface supports the modules according to DVB Specification and CI Plus Specification.
≥Unplug the AC mains lead before you insert or remove the CAM with Smart Card. Remove it slowly.
RQT9434
16
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
17 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
STEP 2 Connection
Satellite cable
≥Connect both satellite terminals (LNB IN 1 and LNB IN 2) to the satellite dish when you want to record 2 programmes simultaneously or view
TV during recording.
≥Connect LNB IN 1 terminal to the satellite dish when you use only one terminal. (You cannot view if you connect only LNB IN 2 terminal.) In
this case, you cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously or view TV during recording.
≥Supply power from another device when you use 2 or more devices to receive satellite broadcast, because this unit does not supply power
when it is turned in standby.
Quick Start
Guide
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Refer to “Additional connections” (> 100) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
≥Refer to “Network connection” (> 103) for connection network.
≥Confirm connections not listed below with your dealer.
Television’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
AV
HDMI IN
LNB IN
HDMI cable
(> below)
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after
all other
connections are
complete.
6
Cooling fan
4
5
Common Interface (CI) slot
In order to view or record TV
services, refer to “STEP 1 Inserting
the CAM (Conditional Access
Module) and Smart Card” (> 16).
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
(> below)
VIDEO
1
2
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
AC IN
Y
L
PB
R
PR
COMMON INTERFACE
LNB
IN 1
13V/18V
400mA max.
Satellite cable
≥Connect the satellite
cable if your television
has a built-in digital
satellite tuner. (It is not
possible to connect the
satellite cable directly to
this unit.)
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
AV2
(EXT)
LNB
IN 2
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
This unit’s rear panel
[Required^setting]
≥Set “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI Audio
Output” to “On” (> 93).
(The default setting is “On”.)
1
2
Satellite cable
(> above)
3
Satellite dish
≥Even when your television does not have an HDMI input terminal, you still can view only with the 21-pin Scart cable connection (5) (However,
functions such as the “HDAVI ControlTM” function cannot be used.)
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]
Using a HDMI cable
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM, High Bit Rate Audio) technology (> 118, 119).
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[> 76, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.
[Note]
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 118) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
Using a 21-pin Scart cable
You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 76).
You can enjoy high-quality viewing [standard definition (SD) quality] by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (> 119).
≥Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 94)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected with a Panasonic TV (VIERA), the following functions are available.
≥Direct TV Recording (> 76)
≥Pause Live TV programme (> 77)
RQT9434
17
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
18 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
6
TV
VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
≥All Channels:
Search for all channels.
≥Free Channels:
Search for free channels only.
CH
AV
PAGE
1
2abc 3def
4ghi 5jkl 6mno
CH
7
7pqrs 8 tuv 9wxyz
SKIP
Press [OK].
Auto Setup starts.
INPUT PROG/CHECK
SELECT
0
DEL
Press [2, 1] to select the Search
Mode.
SLOW/SEARCH
Auto Setup
Satellite
STOP
PAUSE
STATUS
OPTION
ME NU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
LNB in 1
Satellite
Checking...
RETURN
Searching Satellite # Searching Channels
≥These operations may take some time.
After Auto Setup is complete, the time information can be
obtained and Power Save setting screen appears.
RETURN
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
STTL
100%
LNB in 2
Press RETURN to skip Satellite installation
Searching Satellite
FUNCTION
MENU
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
TEXT
Checking...
EXIT
C TION
FUN
,,,
OK
0%
This will take up to 40 minutes.
EXIT
GUIDE
OK
Checking LNB1
Progress
PLAY/x1.3
AUDIO DISPLAY
8
Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off”
and press [OK].
Power Save
On
Off
1
2
Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
Language setting screen appears on the television.
3
Press [3, 4] to select the language
and press [OK].
Country setting screen appears on the television.
4
Press [3, 4] to select the country and
press [OK].
Dish Setup screen appears on the television.
5
Press [3, 4] to select the number of
cables to connect and press [OK].
(> 22, About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously)
≥Two cables ( Same signal ):
Select this item when connecting two cables outputting
same signal to both LNB IN 1 and LNB IN 2.
≥One cable:
Select this item when connecting only one cable to
LNB IN 1.
Search Mode screen appears on the television.
RQT9434
18
On: Minimises standby power consumption,
disables Quick Start function. Unit’s Display
is set to "Automatic".
Off: Enables Quick Start function.
OK
RETURN
≥On:
It will go into the Power Save mode when the power is
turned off.
≥Off:
It is possible to start quickly from standby mode.
The features of the power save function when the unit is in
standby mode are as follows.
Power Save
On§1
Off§2
Power
consumption
Approx. 0.3 W
Approx. 7 W
Start up time
Not Quick
Quick§3
§1
§2
§3
“Unit’s Display” is fixed to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(> 92)
“Unit’s Display” is changed to “Bright” in the Setup menu.
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
– Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it
may take time to display the screen.
After Power Save setting is complete, TV aspect setting
screen appears.
9
19 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
and press [OK].
TV Aspect
16:9 WIDE TV
16:9
4:3 TV
Pan & Scan
午後４時２１分
∫ If the clock setting menu appears (> 95, Clock)
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (> 87, Channel List)
∫ To restart set up (> 87, Auto Setup)
Letterbox
OK
Quick Start
Guide
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
RETURN
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen
television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture.
This setting may not work and the pictures
may be shown in the letterbox style
depending on the content.
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style.
When television picture appears, set up is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus (Common Interface)
1
2
3
4
5
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Connection” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Common Interface” and press [OK].
Connection
TV Aspect
16:9
Aspect for 4:3 Video
4:3
TV System
PAL
HDMI Connection
Component Resolution
AV1 Output
576i/480i
Video
AV2 Settings
Common Interface
Access
OK
RETURN
6
Press [3, 4] to select “Slot 1:” or “Slot 2:” and press [OK].
The features that appear on screen are dependent on the contents of the inserted CAM and Smart Card.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
≥On-screen instructions may not correspond to the remote control buttons.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
≥For more information about TV service, please contact your service provider.
[Note]
≥Other settings on the card, e.g. changing the password, can be adjusted in the Setup menu. (> 94)
≥Depending on the card, in some cases its use together with this unit may be limited or not possible.
RQT9434
19
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
20 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Watching digital broadcasts
Basic
operations
Refer to “Advanced watching digital broadcasts”
(> 27).
∫ Select the station from Channel List
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 87, Favourites Edit)
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
1 Press [OK].
TV
Channel List is displayed.
VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
AV
All DVB Channels
PAGE
1
Numbered
buttons
2abc 3def
4ghi 5jkl 6mno
CH
CH
7pqrs 8 tuv 9wxyz
0
DEL
STOP
Select
INPUT PROG/CHECK
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
STATUS
EXIT
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
ME NU
OPTION
2 Press [3, 4] to select the station and press
[OK].
∫ Select the programme to view using the TV
Guide
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
123/ABC
≥Press the “Red” button to select the “Category”.
≥Press the “Blue” button to change the sorting mode.
EXIT
OK
RETURN
Category
C TION
FUN
,,,
OK
INPUT SELECT
PLAY/x1.3
GUIDE
GUIDE
Sorting 1 2 3...
1 ZDF
2 3 sat
3 KiKa
4 ZDFinfok
5 ZDFdokuk
6 ZDFtheat
7 DKULTUR
RETURN
“Blue”
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 87, Favourites Edit)
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
1 Press [GUIDE].
This unit has the tuner which allows it to directly receive and record
digital satellite channels.
1
2
3
Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times
and select “TV”.
Input Selection
AV1
AV2
AV3
DV
TV
Select
Change
EXIT
RETURN
≥It will switch when the display disappears.
(It will switch faster by pressing [OK])
4
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
WED, 27.05.2009
Landscape
3 KiKa
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
To select channel in Category.
1 Press the “Blue” button to display the list of category.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired item and press [OK].
Operations in the TV Guide system (> 38)
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme to
view and press [OK].
Menu
View
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
≥This is displayed only when the programme currently
broadcasting is selected.
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically.
The length of time the digital channel information is displayed
can be changed. (> 92, On-Screen Messages)
3 Press [3, 4] to select “View” and press [OK].
Unit’s display;
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
15:
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
115:
[0] > [1] > [1] > [5]
1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]
20
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
All DVB Channels
Time: 23:00
23:30
0:00
0:30
1:00
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
1 ZDF
Bruder
Frankfurt
2 3 sat
Valley
News
3 KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
4 ZDFinfok
Wandern im Wald
Ökosystem Savanne
Sonderberichte
5 ZDFdokuk Planète insolite
6 ZDFtheat
PLATINUM/MARS
Hier ist die Familie
7 DKULTUR
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Select Channel
Page Up
OK
Info
OPTION
CH
Page Down
Select Programme
GUIDE
Change display mode
RETURN
-24 hours
+24 hours
Prog. Type
Category
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9434
All Types
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
21 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video/Playing recorded video contents
Refer to “Advanced playback” (> 39) for detail
information.
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them.
TV
VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
AV
Following screen is displayed when recordable disc is inserted.
e.g.,
BD-RE
PAGE
1
Numbered
buttons
2abc 3def
4ghi 5jkl 6mno
Play Video
CH
Copy
7pqrs 8 tuv 9wxyz
0
DEL
SKIP
,
BD-RE is inserted.
INPUT PROG/CHECK
SELECT
OK
SLOW/SEARCH
RETURN
STOP
PAUSE
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
GUIDE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
OPTION
OPTION
OK
1
ME NU
,,,
OK
C TION
FUN
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Video” and press [OK].
It will go to step 3 (> below).
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or BD drive.
The HDD or BD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
≥Select “BD” for any discs. BD indicator will light up.
RETURN
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
e.g., [HDD]
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Titles)
All
Not Viewed
ZDF
Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video
1
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥Play starts from the point specified by the disc.
2
PLAY
RETURN
Select
3
Movie
HDD
Social/Economi
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed)
Start Time 22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)
ZDF
20.03(Thu) Berge und Flüsse
KiKa
04.10(Sat)
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
ZDFdokuk
04.10(Sat)
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
3 sat
29.10(Wed) Soccer Digest
29.10(Wed) Die Rückkehr der Zombies
ZDFdokuk
29.10(Wed) Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
KiKa
29.10(Wed) Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
KiKa
DV
01.01(Thu) DV 21.02.02
Page 001/002
OPTION
Previous
Next
Edit Title
Delete Title
When a menu screen appears on the television
Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
and press [OK].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
Regarding DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 41)
5
1
2
3
Basic
operations
DRIVE SELECT
Playing recorded video contents
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
4
≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered
buttons.
≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the
menu screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
[BD-V]
To display Pop-up Menu
While playing
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the Pop-up Menu.
To display Top Menu
[BD-V]
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” and press [OK].
While stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[DVD-V]
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” and press [OK].
≥You can also press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to return to the menu
screen.
[Note]
[BD-V] You cannot playback while recording from external equipment.
Also, it will stop the playback when the timer recording from external
equipment starts during the playback.
RQT9434
21
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
22 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Recording television programmes [HDD]
Refer to “Advanced recording” (> 29–32) for detail
information.
∫ About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously
There are the following differences during recording depending on
the number of antenna cables connected (> 17).
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
TV
Connection
VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
AV
Broadcast
being
recorded
Unencrypted
broadcast
Encrypted
broadcast§
Unencrypted
broadcast
≤
≤
Encrypted
broadcast§
≤
–
Unencrypted
broadcast
–
–
Encrypted
broadcast§
–
–
PAGE
1
Numbered
buttons
2abc 3def
CH
CH
4ghi 5jkl 6mno
7pqrs 8 tuv 9wxyz
INPUT PROG/CHECK
SELECT
0
DEL
SKIP
Two cables
( Same signal )
INPUT SELECT
SLOW/SEARCH
One cable
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STATUS
EXIT
OK
OPTION
ME NU
,,,
OK
§
C TION
FUN
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
Second broadcast being
recorded or viewed during
recording
To view or record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional
Access Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is
required.
∫ To record 2 programmes simultaneously (> 34)
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
When recording digital broadcast with subtitles, multiple
audio or Teletext
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
REC
This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1
2
Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times
and select “TV” and press [OK].
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
≥To select with the numbered buttons. (> 20)
≥To select the station from channel List. (> 20)
3
Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
“REC1” or “REC2” will light
REC1
Unit’s display
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data
will not be overwritten.
≥When [¥ REC] is pressed while a drive other than the HDD
is selected, it will automatically switch to HDD and start the
recording.
4
To stop recording
Press [∫].
If the following screen appears
Stop Recording
Recording [ ZDF 1 ]
Recording of this programme is in progress.
To stop recording, select "Yes" or press STOP.
Stop this recording ?
Yes
No
OK
RETURN
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
RQT9434
22
If a programme to record has subtitle, multiple audio or Teletext, all
subtitles, multiple audio and Teletext are recorded.
It can be switched while playing back the title.
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the
recording time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
≥This does not work during timer recordings (> 23, 35) or while
using Flexible Recording via AV input (> 61).
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
∫ Refer to “Operation during Recording” (> 34)
for detail information.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
23 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Timer recording
1
TV
VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
WED, 27.05.2009
Landscape
3 KiKa
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
CH
PAGE
2abc 3def
4ghi 5jkl 6mno
CH
7pqrs 8 tuv 9wxyz
0
DEL
INPUT PROG/CHECK
SELECT
SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
ME NU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
Menu
View
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
C TION
FUN
OPTION
OK
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
future programme and press [OK].
≥Following screen is displayed when the programme
currently broadcasting is selected.
EXIT
GUIDE
GUIDE
2
SLOW/SEARCH
STATUS
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
All DVB Channels
Time: 23:00
23:30
0:00
0:30
1:00
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
1 ZDF
Bruder
Frankfurt
2 3 sat
Valley
News
3 KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
4 ZDFinfok
Wandern im Wald
Ökosystem Savanne
Sonderberichte
5 ZDFdokuk Planète insolite
6 ZDFtheat
PLATINUM/MARS
Hier ist die Familie
7 DKULTUR
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Select Channel
Page Up
OK
OPTION
Info
CH
Page Down
Select Programme
GUIDE
Change display mode
RETURN
-24 hours
+24 hours
Prog. Type
Category
AV
1
All Types
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select “Timer Rec Set” and press [OK].
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
HDD 30:24 DR
Timer Recording
Timer Recording using the TV Guide
system
Channel
3
SAT 10.01 2009 19:10
Day/Date Start Stop Drive Mode
SAT 10.01 23:10 23:40 HDD DR
[Prog.Name] Factory Tour
[HDD]
Input Name
KiKa
Prog.Type: Movie
1998, Deutschland
Direktor “N Schmitt”
This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 87, Favourites Edit)
≥You can enter up to 64 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 95).
[Note]
≥TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.
≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (> 93), the TV Guide
system cannot be used.
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
satellite input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected Set Top Box is not possible.
≥To record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional Access
Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is required.
Basic
operations
,,,
OK
OPTION
Press [GUIDE].
OK
RETURN
Category/
AV
Date/
Weekly
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> 35, step 3).
≥In order to make the timer recording work successfully, using
the TV Guide system, the start recording time and finish
recording time can be set to a margin of up to 10 minutes.
(> 90, Start Recording Time, Finish Recording Time)
3
Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon (red) is
displayed.
All Types
0:00
All DVB Channels
0:30
1:00
Les enfants, j’a
News
Timer icon (red)
Unser Auto
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9434
23
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
24 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Timer recording
∫ To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide
screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in
the TV Guide and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
(“F” in the TV Guide disappears.)
∫ To modify the timer recording on the TV Guide
screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in
the TV Guide and press [OPTION].
Menu
View
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Timer Rec Edit” and
press [OK].
(> 35, step 3)
∫ When the TV Guide displays the empty TV Guide
list
WED, 27.05.2009
Landscape
3 KiKa
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
Time: 23:00
1 ZDF
2 3 sat
3 KiKa
Frankfurt
Factory Tour
23:30
All Types
0:00
Valley
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
All DVB Channels
0:30
1:00
News
The empty field
Unser Auto
≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
Set the timer recording manually (> 35).
∫ Manually programming timer recording (> 35)
∫ To set the daily or weekly timer recording (> 35)
∫ To release the unit from timer recording standby
(> 36)
∫ To cancel recording when timer recording has
already begun (> 36)
∫ About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously
(> 22)
∫ Notes on timer recording (> 37)
RQT9434
24
午後４時２１分
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
25 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Deleting titles
1
VOL
DRIVE SELECT
CH
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Titles)
AV
All
PAGE
1
2abc 3def
4ghi 5jkl 6mno
ZDF
CH
7pqrs 8 tuv 9wxyz
DEL
PLAY
RETURN
INPUT PROG/CHECK
SELECT
0
DEL
SKIP
2
PAUSE
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed)
Start Time 22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)
ZDF
20.03(Thu) Berge und Flüsse
KiKa
04.10(Sat)
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
ZDFdokuk
04.10(Sat)
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
3 sat
29.10(Wed) Soccer Digest
ZDFdokuk
29.10(Wed) Die Rückkehr der Zombies
KiKa
29.10(Wed) Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
KiKa
29.10(Wed) Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV
01.01(Thu) DV 21.02.02
Page 001/002
OPTION
Previous
Next
Edit Title
Delete Title
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
ME NU
OPTION
C TION
FUN
OK
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
RETURN
“Blue”
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
≥Title that is currently recording cannot be deleted.
≥Titles on the disc cannot be deleted in the following cases:
– While recording to disc
– While high speed copying
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or BD drive.
Select “BD” for any discs. BD indicator will light up.
≥[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] Release protection (> 84, Setting the
protection).
You can confirm the titles that you have selected using the
option menu. (> 49, Properties)
3
4
Press the “Blue” button.
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Deleting during play
1
While playing
2
Press [DEL].
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
∫ Available disc space after deleting
≥[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for
recording.
Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press the “Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
items you wish to delete.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
EXIT
GUIDE
“Red”
HDD
Social/Economi
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
,,,
OK
Movie
Select
,
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Not Viewed
Basic
operations
DRIVE
SELECT
While stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
TV
The title is deleted.
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles
Title
Title
......
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting
Title
Title
Available disc space
increases after deleting
......
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
Later recorded
titles
Title
Deleted
......
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
This space become available for recording after all the later
recorded titles are deleted.
≥[BD-R] [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase
even after the contents are deleted.
RQT9434
25
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
26 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Copying titles
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Copy
TV
Cancel All
VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
Direction
1 Copy
HDD BD / DVD
CH
AV
2
Copy Mode
3
Create List
PAGE
1
2abc 3def
4ghi 5jkl 6mno
7
0
CH
Start Copying
OK
w
8 tuv 9xyz
SKIP
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
OPTION
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press the “Red” button.
INPUT PROG/CHECK
SELECT
0
DEL
,
VIDEO High Speed
RETURN
p
qrs
Create List Grouped Titles
HDD
SLOW/SEARCH
Date
STOP
PAUSE
STATUS
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB ( 0% )
Title
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
Channel
25.05
01.01 AV2
01.01 AV1
PLAY/x1.3
Time
Title Name
12:36 Soccer Digest
1:35
1:13
Titles
2
1
1
Time
12:36
Rec time
0:52(SP)
EXIT
GUIDE
OK
OPTION
ME NU
,,,
OK
C TION
FUN
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
Page 001/001
RETURN
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
[HDD] > [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
≥About copyright protected titles (> 31, 53)
1
Insert a disc.
6
e.g.,
BD-RE
Copy
BD-RE is inserted.
OK
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
3
Set the copy direction.
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “HDD” and press [OK].
Press [2] to confirm.
Copy
Cancel All
Source
HDD
Direction
1 Copy
HDD BD / DVD
Destination
2
Copy Mode
3
Create List
VIDEO High Speed
0
BD / DVD
Information of the copy destination
- BD-RE
- Copy restricted titles can be
copied on to disc
7
Start Copying
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
4
Set the recording mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].
Press [2] to confirm.
Register titles for copy.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
Set other settings.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Other Settings” and press [1].
“Subtitles”
(Only when copying titles in DR mode and the recording mode
other than High Speed is selected)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Subtitles” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Automatic” or “Off” and press [OK].
≥If “Automatic” is selected
Subtitle in the source titles will be copied.
≥If “Off” is selected
Subtitle in the source titles will not be copied.
“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”
([HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] only)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” or “Create Top Menu” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
≥If “On” is selected
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other
DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or
edit.
– [+RW] Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before
playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Play Video
2
OPTION
Select
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
≥Titles indicated with “
” can not be copied in high
speed mode.
≥To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
4 Press [OK].
5 Press [2] to confirm.
RETURN
CREATE
TIME SLIP CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
OK
RETURN
8
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
To return to the previous screen in step 1 to 7
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising or creating Top Menu)
∫ Copying list icons and functions (> 57)
[Note]
≥Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
simultaneously.
≥Titles recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or NTSC)
from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be
copied.
RQT9434
26
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
27 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Advanced watching digital broadcasts
There are various services included in the digital broadcasts
depending on the programme. You can confirm or set these services
with the following operations.
To show subtitle
Press [STTL
Digital channel information
While stopped
1 ZDF
Bruder
0:50 - 2:30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Switching audio of the TV broadcast
Press [AUDIO].
].
Now
Encrypted
Dolby D
12:55 All DVB Channels
Change category
For info press
≥Audio will switch according to the contents of the programme every
time it is pressed.
MULTI
/
Channel and Station Name
Programme name and Broadcast time
Current category
Change the category
Encrypted broadcast
Audio format (> below)
Subtitle (> right)
Teletext (> 28)
Multiple audio/Sub Channel (> 28)
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ] again.
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
[Note]
You can also select the other channel by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].
when the information screen is displayed.
e.g.,
HD D
41:03 DR
1
ZDF
HDD
41:03 DR
1
ZDF
HD D
41:03 DR
1
ZDF
STEREO LR
deu
(Dolby Digital)
STEREO L
deu
(Dolby Digital)
STEREO R
deu
(Dolby Digital)
HD D
41:03 DR
1
ZDF
HD D
41:03 DR
1
ZDF
HD D
41:03 DR
1
ZDF
STEREO R
deu (MPEG)
STEREO L
deu (MPEG)
STEREO LR
deu (MPEG)
Basic
operations
Press [STATUS
].
≥Press again to hide the subtitle.
[Note]
You can not change the audio channel (L, R) when “Rec for High
Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (> 90)
∫ Audio format of the programme
There are programmes that use Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital, or
MPEG audio formats with the digital broadcasting. You can enjoy
these audio format programmes in high quality by connecting to an
amplifier.
To set the output of the audio
Set either “Bitstream” or “PCM” for “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby
TrueHD”, “DTS/DTS-HD” or “MPEG” in the “Digital Audio Output”
(> 91).
RQT9434
27
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
28 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Advanced watching digital broadcasts
To select content in the digital
broadcast
When a programme of a digital broadcast includes audio signals,
subtitle and sub channel, you can use the following operations to
select signals.
1
2
Press [OPTION].
To show Teletext
You can enjoy teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
When “
1
” appears in digital channel information (> 27)
Press [TEXT
Press [3, 4] to select the
“Multi Audio”, “Sub Channel” or
“Subtitle Language” and press [OK].
e.g.,
Sub page number
<<01 02 03 04 05 06 07
Current
page
number
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Aspect
Play Menu
Multi Audio
Sub Channel
Subtitle Language
Drive Select
3
>>
P100
TELETEXT
INFORMATION
Colour bar
OK
RETURN
≥Multi Audio can also be selected with the [AUDIO] button.
(> 27)
].
2
Press [3, 4], the numbered buttons,
or the colour buttons to select the
page.
Press [2, 1] to select the setting.
≥When there is only one setting available, you cannot select
between items.
Follow the instruction on the screen to select the page.
To show the sub page
(only when there are sub pages)
Press [2, 1].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
∫ Change the Teletext mode
“Teletext” of the Setup menu can be changed to following modes.
(> 92)
≥FLOF (FASTEXT) mode
Four differently coloured subjects are situated at the bottom of
the screen. To access more information about one of these
subjects, press the appropriately coloured button. This facility
enables fast access to information on the subjects shown.
≥TOP mode (in case of TOP text broadcasting)
TOP is a particular improvement of the standard teletext service
that results in an easier search and effective guide.
– Fast overview of the teletext information available
– Easy to use step-by-step selection of the topical subject
– Page status information at the bottom of the screen
≥List mode
Four differently coloured page numbers are situated at the
bottom of the screen. Each of these numbers can be altered
and stored in this unit.
To store frequently viewed page (List mode only)
During the page is displayed
1 Press the colour button of the colour to store.
2 Press and hold [OK].
e.g.,
P100
Broadcast
101
200
400
888
The number changes to white.
To change stored pages (List mode only)
1 Press the colour button of the colour to change.
2 Enter the new page number with the numbered buttons.
3 Press and hold [OK].
To exit the teletext screen
Press [TEXT ].
[Note]
The teletext function depends on respective stations.
RQT9434
28
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
29 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Advanced recording
Title
Recording
Recording method and disc
[HDD]
[BD-RE]
[BD-R]
[RAM]
[-R]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+RW]
[-R]DL]
[+R]DL]
DR
–
–
–
–
–
Timer Recording
DR
–
–
–
–
–
Recording by using [¥ REC] button
XP, SP, LP,
EP
–
–
–
–
–
Timer Recording
XP, SP, LP,
EP, FR
–
–
–
–
–
Recording method
From External
equipment
Recording by using [¥ REC] button
Flexible Recording via AV input
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
–
DV Automatic Recording
XP, SP, LP,
EP
XP, SP, LP,
EP
XP, SP, LP,
EP
XP, SP, LP,
EP
XP, SP, LP,
EP
–
Linked Timer recording (Ext Link)
XP, SP, LP,
EP
–
–
–
–
–
Recording
Using this unit’s
tuner
Basic
operations
Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods and discs.
∫ Maximum number of titles that can be recorded
[HDD]: 999 titles (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[BD-RE] [BD-R]: 200 titles
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]: 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: 49 titles on one disc.
Recording modes and recording contents
Picture quality or audio that can be recorded differ depending on the recording mode.
≥This also explains about copying or DR File Conversion (> 50).
Recording mode
DR
HG, HX, HE, HL
XP, SP, LP, EP
FR (> below)
Quality that can
be recorded
Quality same as
broadcasted
(HD quality and SD quality)
Quality produced by
conversion§1 of broadcast
data (HD quality and SD
quality)
Multiple audio
Record all multiple audio
Record only one audio§2
Subtitles
Can be recorded
Can be recorded§3
The subtitles cannot be switched on or off during playback.
Teletext
Can be recorded
Can be recorded [Copy Title Playing (> 55) only]
You will not be able to switch between display/non-display or execute Teletext operations
in the recorded content.
Sub Channel
Cannot be recorded in timer recording
Surround audio
Surround audio as the
broadcast
§1
§2
§3
§4
Surround Audio produced
by conversion of broadcast
audio format§4
SD quality only
Stereo audio
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 encoding
Before copying or DR File Conversion, select the audio to record.
– “Copy” or “DR File Conversion”: Select the audio with “Preferred Language” in the Setup menu (> 89).
– “Copy Title Playing”: Select the audio with “Multi Audio” in the Disc menu (> 81).
Before copying or DR File Conversion, select the subtitle to record.
– “Copy” or “DR File Conversion”: Select the subtitle with “Preferred Language” in the Setup menu (> 89).
– “Copy Title Playing”:
Subtitle displayed during playback are recorded.
Press [STTL ] to display the subtitle.
Select the subtitle with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu (> 81)
If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output from two front
speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch speaker connection.
∫ FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or recording from external equipment.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
RQT9434
29
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
30 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Advanced recording
∫ Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
[BS850]
(500 GB)
[HDD]
[BS750]
(250 GB)
Single
Layer
(25 GB)
Dual Layer
(50 GB)
Singlesided
(4.7 GB)
Doublesided§2
(9.4 GB)
[-R]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+RW]
(4.7 GB)
[-R]DL]
[+R]DL]
(8.5 GB)
DR§1
(High Definition
(HD) quality:
estimated bit rate is
14 Mbps)
77 hours
37 hours
30 min.
3 hours
30 min.
7 hours
30 min.
–
–
–
–
DR§1
(Standard Definition
(SD) quality:
estimated bit rate is
5 Mbps)
215 hours
105 hours
10 hours
15 min.
21 hours
–
–
–
–
HG
80 hours
40 hours
4 hours
8 hours
–
–
–
–
HX
120 hours
60 hours
6 hours
12 hours
–
–
–
–
HE
180 hours
90 hours
9 hours
18 hours
–
–
–
–
HL
240 hours
120 hours
12 hours
24 hours
–
–
–
–
XP
110 hours
55 hours
5 hours
15 min.
10 hours
30 min.
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour
45 min.
SP
220 hours
110 hours
10 hours
30 min.
21 hours
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
3 hours
35 min.
LP
442 hours
221 hours
21 hours
42 hours
4 hours
8 hours
4 hours
7 hours
10 min.
EP§3
885 hours
(664 hours§4)
441 hours
(331 hours§4)
42 hours
(31 hours
30 min.§4)
84 hours
(63 hours§4)
8 hours
(6 hours§4)
16 hours
(12 hours§4)
8 hours
(6 hours§4)
14 hours
20 min.
(10 hours
45 min.§4)
Recording Mode
[BD-RE] [BD-R]
[RAM]
§1
Recording time of DR mode may vary depending on bit rate of broadcasting.
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
§3 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs.
§4 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “6 hours” in the Setup menu (> 90).
The sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when using “8 hours”.
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “8 hours” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “6 hours” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
§2
∫ Regarding recording time remaining
DR mode recording
Remaining time in the DR mode is calculated with a bit rate of approx. 14 Mbps. But the bit rate differs depending on the broadcast, so the
displayed remaining time might be different from the actual remaining time.
Other recording modes (title conversion or from external input)
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording.
RQT9434
30
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
31 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
2 programmes simultaneous recording
This function can only be used when two satellite cables are connected to the unit (> 17) and “Two cables ( Same signal )” has been
selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 87).
Possible combination for 2 programmes simultaneous recording
and
HDD
Digital broadcast
(DR mode)
HDD
Digital broadcast
or
external input
To perform 2 programmes simultaneous recording, 1 programme out of the 2 needs to be recorded to the
HDD in “DR” mode.
During the recording of an encrypted broadcast, you cannot view or record another encrypted broadcast.
[Note]
≥2 programmes simultaneous recording is not possible in following conditions:
– When “One cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 87).
– When a single satellite cable is connected to the unit (> 17)
– 2 programmes from the external input
– While recording from DV input, or executing “Flexible Recording via AV input”
– While high speed copying
– 2 programmes on same channel cannot be recorded simultaneously by pressing [¥ REC].
Recording
To record both programmes
to the HDD
Types of recording data for copyright protected titles
Titles recorded using CI Plus are copyright protected.
Copying not restricted
It can be copied for indefinite generations.
≥There may be a limitation with the types of disc that can be copied to. (> 53)
One generation copy is
permitted
There are limitations with the types of disc that can be copied to, and the number of copies. (> 53)
≥Original data are deleted when the recording mode is converted. (> 50)
Copying is prohibited
Copy is not possible.
≥You will not be able to playback after a specific period has passed following recording.
≥Playback limitation can be confirmed with Properties. (> 49)
≥Editing, other than Delete and Properties, is not possible. (> 48)
≥Playback/record is not possible when "Automatic" in "Clock" is set to "Off". (> 95)
RQT9434
31
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
32 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Advanced recording
Important notes for recording
16:9 image such as ≥When the “Rec for High Speed Copy” of the Setup menu is “On”
– Record from external equipment.
wide broadcasting
– Copy from the finalised disc (DVD-Video) to the HDD
≥When recording to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
≥When copying to [BD-RE] [BD-R] in HG, HX, HE or HL modes
≥When converting the recording mode from DR mode to HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP or FR modes
It will be recorded in accordance to the setting of “Aspect for Recording” (> 90) in the Setup menu.
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”, recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
– When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
High Speed Copy
Speed to copy the title recorded on the HDD to a disc differs depending on the recording mode of the title and the
disc to copy.
Title in DR mode
[BD-RE] [BD-R] Title can be copied at high speed.
Title in HG, HX, HE, or HL modes
[BD-RE] [BD-R] Title can be copied at high speed.
Title in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes
[RAM] Title can be copied at high speed.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Title can be copied at high speed if “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before the programme is recorded
to HDD from external input. (The default setting is “On”. > 90)
But in the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
DR File Conversion “DR File Conversion” is a function that converts the titles in DR mode to other recording modes.
In general, Data size of a title will be smaller than the original title after conversion.
You can save HDD capacity by deleting the original title after conversion.
Title DR
Available disc space
Converting to other mode
Available disc space
Title DR
Title HL
Deleting the original data
Available disc space
Title HL
Playing the disc on
other players
[BD-RE] [BD-R] Titles may not playback on other Blu-ray Disc player. (> 8)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalised (> 86).
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them
as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW. (> 85)
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Play on other DVD equipment
CHG
SEARCH
ENTER
L
VO
AY
TOP
MEN
U
DISPL
RETURN
MENU
ON
OFF
/I
DC
Finalise
IN
DOUBLE RE-MASTER CD SEQUENTIAL
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
/
/
DISC EXCHANGE
DISC SKIP
OPEN/CLOSE
9V
OPEN
ROUN
A.SUR
MONI
D
TOR
AT
MOD
REPE
E
MODE
PICTURE
[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (> 86).
Recording an
encrypted
broadcast
RQT9434
32
To view or record an encrypted broadcast, insert the CAM (Conditional Access Module) with Smart Card valid for
the broadcast in the CI slot in the rear panel of the unit, and set the CI. (> 16, 19)
≥During the recording of an encrypted broadcast, you cannot view or record another encrypted broadcast.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
33 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Playing while you are recording
Chasing playback
Playback from the beginning of the title in the HDD, while the title is
being recorded to the HDD.
Simultaneous rec and play
Playback the previously recorded title while recording onto the HDD
or timer recording onto the disc.
1
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or BD drive.
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Titles)
All
Not Viewed
ZDF
KiKa
ZDFdokuk
3 sat
ZDF
PLAY
RETURN
Social/Economi
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Berge und Flüsse
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed)
Select
HDD
Movie
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
Recording
≥Select “BD” for any discs.
Start Time 22:46 Rec time0:01(DR)
Page 001/001
OPTION
Edit Title
Delete Title
“[” is displayed on the recording programme.
3
Press [3, 4] to select a title and
press [OK].
To stop play
Press [∫].
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.
2 Press [∫].
[Note]
≥“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
≥Depending on the state of the unit, playback may not be possible.
(> 104)
RQT9434
33
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
34 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Advanced recording
Operation during Recording
Check the
recording
programme
Press [STATUS
].
e.g., while 2 programmes simultaneous
recording
Recording programme
displayed on the TV screen
Recording programme not
displayed on the TV screen
HDD
REC1
1
ZDF
3 KiKa REC2
Switch the
input
Press [INPUT SELECT].
Switch to
other
channel§
Press [W X CH].
Display the
recording
programme
on the TV
screen
It is necessary to display the recording
programme onto the TV screen to perform
operations such as pause.
≥If the input was switched:
Press [INPUT SELECT].
≥If the channel was switched:
Press [W X CH].
≥If the drive was switched:
Press [DRIVE SELECT].
To stop
recording
It is necessary to display the programme you
want to stop on the TV screen. (> above)
≥Other operation (> 20)
≥During the recording of an encrypted
broadcast, you cannot view or record another
encrypted broadcast. (> 22)
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is
called one title.
To pause
recording
It is necessary to display the programme you
want to pause on the TV screen. (> above)
Press [;].
≥Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
≥If paused while recording in DR mode, the
paused part may become a still picture for a
moment during playback of that programme.
Perform 2
Record other programme with
programmes steps 1–3 on page 22.
simultaneous ≥One of the 2 programmes needs to be digital
broadcasting recorded with DR mode.
recording§
“REC1” and “REC2” will light
REC1
Unit’s display
REC2
≥Channel switch / input switch while performing
2 programmes simultaneous recording will
switch between the 2 recording programmes.
§
RQT9434
34
This function can only be used when two satellite cables are
connected to the unit (> 17) and “Two cables ( Same signal )”
has been selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 87).
午後４時２１分
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
35 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Advanced timer recording
≥Mode
Recording modes and recording contents (> 29)
“XP”, “SP”, “LP”, “EP”, “FR” can be selected when “Channel”
is selected in “AV input”.
It will be fixed to DR mode if anything else is selected.
Manually programming timer recording
Timer recording of the broadcast
Recording disc: [HDD]
Recording mode: DR
Timer recording from the external equipment connected to AV1, AV2
or AV3
Recording disc: [HDD]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 87, Favourites Edit)
≥You can enter up to 64 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
≥Renew (Auto Renewal Recording) (> 36)
≥Input Name
Press [OK]. (> 80, Entering text)
4
Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon (red) is
displayed.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 95).
1
Timer Recording
HDD 30:30 DR
Channel Name
ZDF
Hunter.\*Episode 5\*
FRI 23.01.2009 8:59
Space
Schedule
Drive/Mode
FRI 27.03
22:20 - 22:30
HDD
DR
OK
New Timer Programme
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Recording
Timer icon (red)
Check for available space on HDD, etc., when the “!” is
displayed. (> 37)
Timer Recording
HDD 30:30 DR
FRI 23.01.2009 8:59
Channel Name
Schedule Drive/Mode Space
New Timer Programme
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Total 0/64
Turn
Timer Off
OK
RETURN
2
3
DEL Delete
Page Up CH
Page Down
Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
Programme” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select the items and
change the items with [3, 4].
Timer Recording
HDD 30:24 DR
SAT 10.01 2009 19:10
All DVB Channels
Channel
1
Day/Date Start Stop Drive Mode
SAT 10.01 23:10 -HDD DR
[Prog.Name]
Category/AV
Input Name
ZDF
RETURN
Category/
AV
Date/
Weekly
≥Channel
Select the channel to record.
You can press the “Red” button (Category/AV) to change
“AV input”, “All DVB Channels”, “Free Channels”, “Radio” or
“Favourites1”, etc.
You can perform this operation when you select the box of
“Channel”.
You can also select channel with the numbered buttons.
≥Day/Date
You can select current date up to one month later minus one
day. You can select “Date” or “Weekly” by pressing the
“Green” button only when “Day/Date” is selected. Titles
recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are bundled
and displayed as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen (> 41) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.
≥Start/Stop
Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and Stop
(Finish time) in 15-minute increments.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
∫ Timer Recording using the TV Guide system
(> 23)
∫ To release the unit from timer recording standby
(> 36)
∫ To cancel recording when timer recording has
already begun (> 36)
∫ About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously
(> 22)
∫ Notes on timer recording (> 37)
[Note]
≥To record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional Access
Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is required.
RQT9434
35
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
36 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Advanced timer recording
To release the unit from timer recording
standby
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
1
2
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press the “Red” button.
To cancel recording when timer
recording has already begun
Press [INPUT SELECT] or [W X CH] to display the programme that
you want to stop recording on the TV screen while 2 programmes
are simultaneously recording.
1
Press [∫].
e.g.,
Stop Recording
≥The timer icon “F” (> 37) will change from red to grey.
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (red) remains in the timer recording
list.
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby. (The timer icon “F” will change to red.)
Recording [ ZDF 1 ]
Timer recording of this programme in progress.
Stop this timer recording ?
Yes
No
OK
Auto Renewal Recording
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
1
2
3
4
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Renew”
column.
Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
[OK].
[Note]
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while playback is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
RQT9434
36
RETURN
2
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
≥If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have already set a weekly, daily timer recording, the
recording will start at the next scheduled time.
37 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Check, change or delete a programme
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer Recording
HDD 75:15 DR
FRI 27.03.2009 21:41
Channel Name
Schedule Drive/Mode Space
KiKa
Factory Tour
ZDF
Bruder
ZDFdokuk
Bowling Biographie
ZDF
Duell des Nachmittags
WED 27.05
22:20 - 23:45
FRI 27.03
10:40 - 12:00
FRI
22:30 - 23:25
FRI 27.03
21:30 - 23:30
HDD
DR
HDD
DR
HDD
DR
HDD
DR
OK
OK
-->
24.04
New Timer Programme
Total 4/64
OK
RETURN
DEL Delete
Turn
Timer Off
Page Up
Page Down
CH
Icons
F
[
午後４時２１分
Notes on timer recording
≥Only 1 programme can be set to timer recording on the disc.
≥Timer recording will not be performed if the clock is not set.
≥If the “TV System” (> 93) in the Setup menu was modified to
playback a disc or a title while on timer recording standby, return
the setting to original before the recording is started.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing. Depending on the state of the unit, playback may stop
when recording begins.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while copying in normal speed
mode.
≥The timer recording starts, whether the unit is turned on or off.
When the recording starts with the unit turned on, if you should turn
the unit off the recording status is not affected.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, last 1 minute of earlier programme
will not be recorded unless it can perform 2 programmes
simultaneous recording.
Programme
Red: Timer recording standby is activated.
Grey: Timer recording standby is not activated.
This programme is currently recording.
Part or all of the programme will not be recorded since
the programme is overlapping.
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
The programme was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
The programme did not complete recording because of
some reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(> 36).
The timer recording of the encrypted broadcast is
overlapping another programme.
Programme
Not recorded
Recorded
Recording
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
Recorded
≥If timer recordings overlap around the same time, some
programmes will not be recorded depending on the set timer
recordings. As for programmes with “ ” displayed on the timer
recording list screen, some portion or all of the programmes cannot
be recorded. Press [PROG/CHECK] to confirm. (> left)
≥It is not possible to simultaneously record multiple programmes
from encrypted broadcasts.
Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
(> 104)
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the remaining space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display will
show until when recordings can be made (up to a
maximum of one month from the present time) based on
the time remaining on the disc.
!:
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left.
≥the number of possible titles has reached its maximum.
(> 29)
≥programmes are deactivated.
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (> 35,
step 3)
∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DEL].
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
[Note]
≥Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT9434
37
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
38 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Advanced timer recording
Operations in the TV Guide system
Selecting the programme from the desired
programme type or Category
Basic operations
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait
view.
Landscape view
1
Time: 23:00
23:30
0:00
0:30
1:00
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
1 ZDF
Bruder
Frankfurt
2 3 sat
Valley
News
3 KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
4 ZDFinfok
Wandern im Wald
Ökosystem Savanne
Sonderberichte
5 ZDFdokuk Planète insolite
6 ZDFtheat
PLATINUM/MARS
Hier ist die Familie
7 DKULTUR
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Select Channel
Page Up
OK
Info
OPTION
CH
Page Down
Select Programme
GUIDE
Change display mode
RETURN
-24 hours
+24 hours
Prog. Type
Category
From the desired programme type
Press the “Yellow” button to display
the list of programme type.
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
All DVB Channels
All Types
WED, 27.05.2009
Landscape
3 KiKa
23:00-23:45 Factory Tour
This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme
type (e.g. Movie, Sport) or Category (e.g. TV, Radio).
From the desired Category
2
Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of category.
Press [3, 4] to select the desired
item.
Prog.Type
All Types
All Types
Movie
News
Entertainment
Sport
Children’s
Music
Art/Culture
Social/Economic
Education
Lifestyle
Portrait view
WED, 27.05.2009
3 sat
KiKa
ZDFinfok
Factory Tour
23:00-23:45
Unser Auto
23:45-01:30
News
01:30-02:00
Healing Raum
02:00-03:45
Mythologie
03:45-05:30
News
05:30-06:00
Brot-Fabrik
06:00-08:00
Solar System
08:00-10:15
Select Programme
Info
OK
Select Channel
RETURN
-24 hours
+24 hours
To change channels
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
All DVB Channels
All Types
Portrait
ZDFdokuk
OPTION
GUIDE
ZDFtheat
Page Up
Page Down
CH
Change display mode
Prog. Type
Category
Landscape view
Press [3, 4] to select a channel.
3
To browse through
the TV Guide list
Press [W X CH].
To see programme
information
(Programmes with the
symbol)
Press [STATUS
].
Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time,
description) is available for these
programmes.
Press [3, 4] to scroll up and down.
To show other pages
Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH] (Next).
Press [STATUS
programme list.
] again to return to the
All DVB Channels
Free Channels
Pay Channels
TV
Radio
Favourites1
Favourites2
Favourites3
Favourites4
Press [OK].
≥A list appears with all programmes of the selected item.
≥When you select the Landscape view, the unit displays
programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected
programme type.
Portrait view
Press [2, 1] to select a channel.
The TV Guide list appears for this channel.
To view a programme ≥Jump ahead 24 hours
list for another day
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be viewed.
When jumping, the selected time period
may deviate.
Category
All DVB Channels
WED, 27.05.2009
Landscape
5 ZDFdokuk
23:50-3:00 Sonderberichte
News
WED 27.05.2009 14:54
All DVB Channels
Time: 23:00
23:30
0:00
0:30
1:00
Hunter. \*Episode 5\*
1 ZDF
Bruder
Frankfurt
2 3 sat
News
Valley
3 KiKa
Factory Tour
Unser Auto
4 ZDFinfok
Wandern im Wald
Ökosystem Savanne
Sonderberichte
5 ZDFdokuk Planète insolite
6 ZDFtheat
PLATINUM/MARS
Hier ist die Familie
7 DKULTUR
Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden
Select Channel
Page Up
CH
OK
Info
OPTION
Page Down
Select Programme
GUIDE Change display mode
RETURN
-24 hours
+24 hours
Prog. Type
Category
e.g.,
Programme type,
“News” is selected in
step 2 of Landscape
view.
[Note]
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.
This function does not work properly unless the information which
distinguishes the programme type and profiles sent from broadcast
stations is correct.
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme.
To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected
the programme type or Category
Select “All Types” of the programme type or “All DVB Channels” of
the Category in step 2. (> above)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
TV Guide data download
≥TV Guide data is downloaded automatically while the unit is turned
on.
If the unit is turned off at the specified time, the TV Guide data is
downloaded automatically. (> 95)
≥Depending on the state of the unit, data is not downloaded during
2 programmes simultaneous recording and the like.
≥You cannot download TV Guide data during recording when “One
cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 87).
RQT9434
38
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
39 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Advanced playback
Playing back
≥Refer to page 44 for playing DivX.
≥Refer to page 64 for playing still pictures.
≥Refer to page 70 for playing music.
[Note]
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (> 93).
≥A disc or title with different “TV System” (> 93) may not be able to playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording. You will be
able to playback by changing the “TV System” settings in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording, change back the settings before
the recording starts.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television
screen and so on.
Operation during play
Stop
Press [∫].
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
≥[BD-V] On BD-Video discs including BD-J (> 118), the resume play function does not work.
Recording
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [DVD-V] [AVCHD] DivX
≥Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.
≥[HDD] :
Stopped position for each title is memorized.
≥Discs:
Only previous stopped position is memorized.
The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[AVCHD] (SD card), DivX:
Only previous stopped position is memorized.
The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Pause
Press [;].
Search
Press [6] or [5].
Skip
Starting from a
selected title
[BD-V] [DVD-V] [AVCHD]
Playing
back
Stopped position
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level search forward.
DivX: Audio is not heard during all levels search.
≥[BD-V] Only primary video is played while performing this operation.
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip to the title or chapter you want to play.
≥It will skip to the beginning of chapters (> 51) if the title contains chapters.
≥[HDD] It will not skip the title. But the title in the grouped titles during the “Grouped Playback” (> 42) will be
skipped.
≥DivX: Press [:] to return to the beginning of the title currently playing.
Press the numbered buttons.
Play starts from the selected title or chapter.
≥[BD-V] [AVCHD]
Input a 3-digit number
e.g.,
5: [0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [1] > [5]
≥[DVD-V]
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
5: [0] > [5]
15: [1] > [5]
≥While stopped (the screen on the right is displayed on the television), the title is
designated. While playing, the chapter is designated.
Quick View
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Except
[-RW‹V›] (It will not work even if it
is finalised)
[-RW‹VR›], DivX
Play speed is quicker than normal.
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
≥Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode titles or [BD-V] [AVCHD].
≥[BD-V] Only primary video is played while performing this operation.
Slow-motion
While paused, press [6] or [5].
Except DivX
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[BD-V] [AVCHD]
Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [BD-V] [DVD-V] [AVCHD]).
≥[BD-V] Only primary video is played while performing this operation.
≥You cannot perform this operation when you playback the radio programme.
RQT9434
39
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
40 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Advanced playback
Frame-by-frame
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
Except DivX
Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[BD-V] [AVCHD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
≥[BD-V] Only primary video is played while performing this operation.
≥You cannot perform this operation when you playback the radio programme.
Skipping the
specified time
(Time Slip)
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time and press [OK].
Except [BD-V] [DVD-V] [AVCHD],
DivX
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute intervals. (Press and
hold for 10-minute intervals.)
-5min.
Manual Skip
This automatically disappears after approximately 5 seconds. To show the
screen again press [TIME SLIP] again.
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Except [BD-V], DivX
Each time you press, play restarts approximately 1 minute later.
Aspect
Create Chapter
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen (> 83)
Chapters are divided at the point pressed. (> 51)
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
Changing audio during play
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [DVD-V] [AVCHD] DivX
Press [AUDIO].
It will switch depending on the contents recorded every time it is
pressed.
e.g., [HDD] “Audio LR, deu” is selected.
Display the subtitle during play
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R]
It is possible to display the subtitles during the playback if the
programme with subtitle is recorded with DR mode.
Press [STTL
].
≥It will switch between On/Off every time it is pressed.
[BD-V] [DVD-V] [AVCHD] DivX
Display with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu (> 81).
HDD
PLAY
Display the Teletext during play
Audio LR
deu
[BD-V] [DVD-V] [AVCHD]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (> 81, Soundtrack).
Soundtrack
1 ENG
Digital 3/2.1ch
e.g., English is selected.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and
+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, singlesided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is not enough
space on the first layer to record a programme, the remainder is recorded
on the second layer. When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit
automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way
as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut
out when the unit is switching layers.
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R]
It is possible to display the Teletext during the playback if the
programme with Teletext is recorded with DR mode.
Press [TEXT
].
≥It will switch between On/Off every time it is pressed.
[Note]
≥List mode cannot be used. (> 28)
≥Teletext cannot be displayed when the subtitle is On. (> above)
≥You cannot use “Skipping the specified time (Time Slip)”, “Manual
Skip” or “Create Chapter” when Teletext is being displayed.
DVD-R DL
+R DL
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
Second recordable layer
The available space
First recordable layer
Title 1
Title 2
Playback direction
(Inner section of the disc)
RQT9434
40
(Outer section of the disc)
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
41 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR
e.g., [HDD]
Display status
(Grouped Titles or All Titles) (> right)
Genre Label
([HDD] only) (> below)
Label§1
(> below)
(Grouped Titles)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All
Not Viewed
Social/Economi
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
ZDF
KiKa
3 sat
3 sat
ZDF
Time Remaining
Sports
45:54 (DR)
Video (AVCHD)
Berge und Flüsse
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed)
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
CAP 24
DV
PLAY
RETURN
HDD
Movie
Start Time 22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
OPTION
Select
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
Page 001/002
Previous
Edit Title
Icons (> below)
Next
Delete Title
Selected title§3
Thumbnail§2
§1
§2
§3
Label will only display “All” when using media other than HDD.
Thumbnail is displayed for the selected title only except for with
HDD.
If the title has a long name, the name scrolls once only.
Regarding Label [HDD]
Titles recorded to HDD will be categorized to the following labels
automatically depending on the contents of the titles.
It is convenient when searching for the titles you want to playback.
Press [2, 1] to select the label.
All:
All titles
Not Viewed:
Titles that have not been viewed yet
Genre Label:
(News, Movie,
etc.)
Titles sorted in categories according to the
information of the recorded programme
≥Some titles may not be sorted correctly.
≥Categories for Genre Label can be changed.
(> 42)
Video ( AVCHD ):
High definition video acquired from the disc,
SD card or USB device
Switching of the Navigator [HDD]
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” and
press [OK].
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode
are bundled and displayed as one item.
Select the item marked with
bundled titles.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Titles)
All
Not Viewed
ZDF
KiKa
ZDFdokuk
3 sat
ZDF
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
[
Currently recording.
Social/Economi
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Helicopter Informationen
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Berge und Flüsse
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
KiKa
DV
OK
RETURN
HDD
Movie
and press [OK] to display the
Playing
back
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them by using
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Titles 4
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
Page 001/002
OPTION
Previous
Edit Title
Select
Next
Delete Title
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording protection
t
Title cannot be played
(When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.)
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (All Titles)
All
ZDF
KiKa
ZDFdokuk
3 sat
Title that is copyright protected (One generation copy
is permitted) (> 31)
Title that is copyright protected (Copying is prohibited)
within playback period (> 31)
≥Playback period limit can be checked in the
Properties of that title. (> 49)
Title that is copyright protected (Copying is prohibited)
past playback period (> 31)
(Gray)
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)
Title that has not yet been played ([HDD] only)
Title recorded using a different encoding system from
that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(> 93).
HDD
Not Viewed
ZDF
Movie
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
PLAY
RETURN
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Berge und Flüsse
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed)
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
KiKa
DV
Select
Social/Economi
OPTION
Start Time 22:46 Rec time0:01(DR)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
Page 001/002
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Delete Title
Playback the title that was viewed
once [HDD]
You can choose to start the playback from the point you have last
stopped, or from the beginning when the resume play function
(> 39) is operating.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play from the Beginning” or “Play
from Last Viewed” and press [OK].
Radio programme
RQT9434
41
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
42 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR
To change the Genre Label [HDD]
Genre displayed in the Genre Label can be changed.
1 Press [2, 1] to select the Genre Label (Movie, News, Sports,
etc.) and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Genre Label Setting” and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the genre and press [OK].
To play grouped titles [HDD]
(Grouped Titles screen only)
∫ Play the selected titles
1 Press [3, 4] to select the group and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press [OK].
∫ Play the titles continuously (Grouped Playback)
While the Grouped Titles screen is displayed,
Press [3, 4] to select the group and press [1] (PLAY).
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
(Grouped Titles screen only)
1 Press [3, 4] to select a title or a group and press the “Red”
button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press [OK].
Create Group:
Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK].
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
Release Grouping:
Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].
≥All the titles in the group are released.
Remove:
(Only when titles in a group have been selected)
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove” and press [OK].
Selected titles are removed from the group.
∫ Regarding the group name
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Titles)
All
Not Viewed
ZDF
KiKa
ZDFdokuk
3 sat
ZDF
Select
HDD
Social/Economi
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Helicopter Informationen
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Berge und Flüsse
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
KiKa
DV
OK
RETURN
Movie
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
All
Not Viewed
NRJ
Paris
ZDFdokuk
NRJ
Paris
ZDFdokuk
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Delete Title
HDD
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Social/Economi
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
20.03(Thu)
Berge
undCOURAGE
Flüsse“LETRANGE MONSIEUR
France 229.10(Wed)
HD 04.10(Sat)
KD2A22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)
Start Time
AV1
NRJ Paris
DV 21.02.02
Movie
ZDFIDF1
Titles 4
Page 001/002
OPTION
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Titles)
PLAY
PLAY
RETURN
RETURN
Select
Select
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed) FAN
Die DE
Rückkehr der Zombies
MAG
29.10(Wed)
30.10(Thu) LIVE
Die Rückkehr
der Zombies
Star31.10(Fri)
Academy Experiment 1
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec time0:01(DR)
NRJ Paris
CAP 24
CAP 24
DV
OPTION
OPTION
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
LIVE MAG
ACTU and CO
ACTU and CO
DV 21.02.02
Page001/002
001/001
Page
Previous
EditTitle
Title
Edit
Next
DeleteTitle
Title
Delete
To change the group name
1 Press [3, 4] to select the group and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Title Name” and press [OK].
4 Enter the name. (> 80, Entering text)
≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will
not be changed.
[Note]
≥These functions are only available for videos and not available for
music and still pictures.
RQT9434
42
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
43 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Playback of the High Definition Video (AVCHD)
[AVCHD]
Only AVCHD recorded or edited on a Panasonic’s video camera will
be recognised. An SD card or disc that contains AVCHD recorded on
devices other than a Panasonic’s video camera may not be
recognised.
1
Insert the disc or the SD card
The display below automatically appears.
Disc
e.g., [RAM]
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
To display the top menu
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When the top menu or the “DIRECT NAVIGATOR” is not
displayed
Refer to “Starting from a selected title” (> 39) to playback.
Operation during play (> 39)
DVD-RAM ( AVCHD )
Play Video ( AVCHD )
[Note]
≥Set “Play Video ( AVCHD ) on BD-RE / BD-R” to “On” for the disc
that has high definition video (AVCHD) recorded on the
Panasonic’s video camera, etc. and high definition quality title that
was recorded on this unit. (> 89)
≥Multiple titles may not playback continuously depending on the
disc. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], and playback by selecting the
title.
≥It may pause for a few seconds on the break of images when
editing such as partial deletion is performed.
≥High definition video (transfer rate of 24 Mbps or faster) cannot be
played back correctly if it was recorded on a DVD compatible with
double speed or slower.
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
This disc is play-only and cannot be recorded or
copied to.
OK
RETURN
[SD]
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
SD card is inserted.
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Video
( AVCHD )” and press [OK].
≥If the top menu of the disc or SD card to play was
3
– Created:
Display the top menu
– Not created:
Display the “DIRECT NAVIGATOR” screen
If the “DIRECT NAVIGATOR” screen is not
displayed, press [1] (PLAY) to playback
and press [:, 9] or [6, 5] to
select the programme.
If the menu screen (> left) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 [BD-RE] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Press [3, 4] to select “Blu-ray Disc / DVD” and press [OK].
[SD]
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
Playing
back
OK
Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [OK].
e.g., [SD] DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Video ( AVCHD )
SD CARD
No. Date Day Time
Rec time
00:00.07
Title Name
001 15.12 SAT 19:36 Fantasista
002 07.12 FRI 12:35 2007.12.07
----------------Page 01/01
OK
OPTION
RETURN
Playback of the playlist created on other equipment
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc.
1
While stopped
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Blu-ray Disc /
DVD” and press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
playlist and press [OK].
e.g., [RAM]
Playlists
Playlist View
DVD-RAM
--
01
02
05.06(THU) 0:12.12
05.07(MON) 0:07.31
--
--
--
Blu-ray
Play all Video
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music
TV Guide
Copy
View
Others
SD
3
Previous
OK
DVD-RAM
Play Video
Playlists
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
DVD Management
Blu-ray Disc / DVD
SD Card
USB
OK
RETURN
Page 01/01
Next
OPTION
RETURN
Select for playback of disc and formatting of disc etc.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Operation during play (> 39)
RQT9434
43
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
44 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Playing DivX®
Playing DivX video contents
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an
official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
1
Using the tree screen to find a folder
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press
[OK].
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Insert a disc or USB memory.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
e.g., [CD]
OK
Select Folder
12_02_2004
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
F 1/21
RETURN
Page 01/01
CD
F: Selected folder no./
Total folder no. including
DivX title.
You cannot select folders
that contain no compatible
files.
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
3 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
The file list for the folder appears.
Slect file type.
OK
RETURN
≥It will go to step 3 automatically if only DivX is recorded on
the disc.
[USB]
USB
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Video
( DivX )” and press [OK].
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
DivX
Title Name
No.
001
ABC.divx
OK
RETURN
Select a folder from OPTION menu.
Page 01/01
OPTION
≥Files are treated as titles.
3
Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected title.
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Press [3, 4] to select “Blu-ray Disc / DVD” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥Successive play is not possible.
≥Playback is not possible during recording.
RQT9434
44
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
45 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
About DivX Subtitle Text display
Regarding DivX VOD content
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX® Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.
First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and
submit it during the registration process.
[Important: DivX VOD content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital
Rights Management) system that restricts playback to registered
DivX Certified devices. If you try to play DivX VOD content not
authorized for your device, the message “Authorisation Error.” will be
displayed and your content will not play.]
Learn more at www.divx.com/vod.
Display the unit’s registration code.
(> 95, “DivX Registration”)
DivX Registration
∫ Displaying subtitles text
1 During play, press [DISPLAY].
≥DivX video files that do not display “Text” do not contain
subtitles text.
Subtitles text cannot be displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc” and press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Subtitles” and press
[1].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “On”.
≥If the subtitles text are not displayed correctly, try changing the
language settings (> below).
DivX® Video On Demand
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
You can display subtitles text recorded onto the DivX video disc on
this unit.
This function has no relation to the subtitles specified in DivX
standard specifications and has no clear standard. Depending on
the methods used to create the file, the following functions may not
work.
8 alphanumeric characters
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
∫ Subtitles text language settings
After playing back a DivX video file containing subtitles text
1
2
3
4
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)
≥The remaining number of plays decreases each time a program is
played. However, when playing from the point where play was
previously stopped, the remaining number of plays does not
decrease due to the resume play function.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “HDD / Disc” and press
[OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Settings for Playback”
and press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “DivX Subtitle Text” and
press [OK].
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Latin 1”, “Latin 2”, or
“Cyrillic” then press [OK].
Playing
back
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
≥The initial setting is “Latin 1”.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
∫ Types of subtitles text file that can be displayed
Subtitles text that satisfy the following conditions can be displayed
on this unit.
≥File format: MicroDVD, SubRip, or TMPlayer
≥File extension: “.SRT”, “.srt”, “.SUB”, “.sub”, “.TXT”, or “.txt”
≥The DivX video file and subtitles text file are inside the same folder,
and the file names are the same except for the file extensions.
≥If there are more than one subtitles text files inside the same folder,
they are displayed in the following order of priority: “.srt”, “.sub”,
“.txt”.
∫ Limitations of this unit
≥In the following situations, the subtitles cannot be displayed as
recorded. Furthermore, depending on the methods used to create
the file or the state of the recording, only parts of the subtitles may
be displayed, or the subtitles may not be displayed at all.
– When special text or characters are included in the subtitles text.
– When the file size is larger than 256 KB.
– When characters with styling specified are included in the
subtitle data.
Codes that specify the character style within files are displayed
as subtitle characters.
– When data with a different format exists within the subtitle data.
≥If the file name of the DivX video file is not displayed correctly on
the menu screen (the file name is displayed as “_”), the subtitles
text may not be displayed correctly.
≥Depending on the disc, the subtitles text cannot be displayed when
search and other such operations are being performed.
RQT9434
45
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
46 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
To enjoy the BD Video which supports BONUSVIEW or BD-Live [BD-V]
What is BONUSVIEW?
BONUSVIEW allows you to enjoy functions such as picture-in
picture or secondary audio etc., with BD-Video supporting BD-ROM
Profile 1 version 1.1/Final Standard Profile.
What is BD-Live?
In addition to the BONUSVIEW function, BD-Video supporting BDROM profile 2 that has a network extension function allows you to
enjoy more functions such as subtitles, exclusive images and online
games by connecting this unit to the Internet. In order to use the
Internet feature, you must have this unit connected to a broadband
network. (> 103)
≥These discs may not be on sale in certain regions.
≥The usable functions and the operating method may vary with
each disc, please refer to the instructions on the disc and/or visit
their website.
Playing secondary video (picture-inpicture) and secondary audio
Secondary video can be played from a disc compatible with the
picture-in-picture function.
For the playback method, refer to the instructions for the disc.
Image of the secondary video
e.g.,
Secondary video
Primary video
When the secondary video does not display
Turn the “Video” and “Soundtrack” to “On” in the “Secondary Video”
in the “Signal Type” in the Disc menu. (> 81)
≥To output the audio of the secondary video, set the “BD-Video
Secondary Audio” to “On” in the Setup menu (> 91).
[Note]
≥Discs may not always be played back according to the settings on
this unit, as certain playback formats are prioritized on certain
discs.
≥Only the primary video is played during search/slow-motion/Quick
View or frame-by-frame.
≥When the secondary video is turned off, the secondary audio is not
be played.
RQT9434
46
Enjoying BD-Live discs with Internet
Many BD-Live compatible discs require content to be downloaded
onto an SD card (> 118, Local storage) in order to access the
available BD-Live features.
≥An SD card with 1 GB or more of free space (SD Speed Class
Rating 2 or higher) needs to be inserted prior to inserting the BD
Live compatible disc.
Some BD-Live content available on the Blu-ray Disc may require an
Internet account to be created in order to access the BD-Live
content. Follow the screen display or instruction manual of the disc
for information on acquiring an account.
Preparation
≥Connect to the network. (> 103)
≥Set “Network Settings” in the Setup menu. (> 94)
1 Insert an SD card (> 15).
≥If the SD card menu screen is displayed, press [RETURN
exit the SD card menu screen.
] to
2 Insert the disc (> 15).
≥For operation method, refer to the instructions on the disc.
To use the above functions, it is recommended that you format the
card on this unit. (> 85)
[Note]
≥While using this feature, do not remove the SD card. Doing so will
cause playback to stop.
≥A message may be displayed when SD card doesn’t have enough
storage capacity for BD-Live content. Please make space available
on the current SD card, or insert another SD card.
≥The unit must be connected to the Internet and set up (> 96) to
use the BD-Live functions. “BD-Live” may need to be changed for
certain discs (> 89).
≥When discs supporting BD-Live are played back, the player or disc
IDs may be sent to the content provider via the Internet.
≥The unit is connected to the Internet when BD-Live functions are
used, generating communication charges.
≥The playback may be paused depending on the communication
environment. Some functions may be disabled to prevent skipping
to sections that have not been downloaded, etc.
≥Delete the unnecessary video data recorded in the SD card by
using “Delete BD-Video data”. (> 85)
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
47 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
To enjoy High Bit Rate Audio and Video
Enjoying High Bit Rate Audio with 7.1ch speaker
This unit can decode High Bit Rate Audio (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio and DTS-HD Master Audio)
adopted in BD-Video.
To enjoy 7.1ch surround sound, the following conditions are necessary (Part shown in the shaded area of table given below).
≥Connect an amplifier/receiver with 7.1ch speaker supporting HDMI (High Bit Rate Audio) using a High Speed HDMI cable. (> 102)
≥Set “BD-Video Secondary Audio” to “Off”. (> 91)
≥Set “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD” or “DTS/DTS-HD” to “Bitstream” or “PCM”. (> 91)
About audio from audio output terminal
Connect an amplifier/receiver and confirm the desired audio type and necessary settings (“BD-Video Secondary Audio”, “Dolby D/Dolby D +/
Dolby TrueHD” or “DTS/DTS-HD”).
≥The number of channels listed is the maximum possible number of output channels.
≥Also, depending on the specifications or the settings of the amplifier/receiver, the results of the output may vary.
§1
§2
§3
§4
§5
§6
§7
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
“Bitstream”
“PCM”
“On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off”
Dolby Digital/
Dolby Digital EX§7
Dolby Digital
DTS Digital
Surround
DTS-ES§7
Down-mixed 2ch
PCM
Playing
back
Terminal
HDMI AV OUT
“Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby
TrueHD”/
“Bitstream”§1
“PCM”§3
“DTS/DTS-HD”
“BD-Video Secondary
“Off”
“On”
“Off”
“On”§2
Audio”
[DVD-V] 5.1ch PCM
Dolby Digital/
Dolby Digital/
Dolby Digital/
[BD-V] 7.1ch§4
Dolby Digital EX§6
Dolby Digital EX§7 Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital
7.1ch PCM
7.1ch PCM§2, 4
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD
DTS Digital Surround/
DTS Digital
[DVD-V] 5.1ch PCM
DTS Digital
Surround/
Surround/
DTS-ES§6
[BD-V]
7.1ch PCM§5
DTS-ES
DTS-ES§7
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD High
Audio
Resolution Audio
DTS Digital
7.1ch PCM§5
Surround
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master
Audio
7.1ch LPCM
7.1ch PCM
DTS Digital
Surround
Down-mixed 2ch
PCM
When the connected equipment is not supported with these audio format, the audio is output as Dolby Digital bitstream, DTS Digital Surround
bitstream or down-mixed 2ch PCM (e.g., TV)
[BD-V]: When playing BD-Video without secondary audio or clicking sound, the audio is output as the same format as if “BD-Video Secondary
Audio” was set to “Off”. (> 91)
When the connected equipment is not supported with multi channel surround, the audio is output as down-mixed 2ch PCM.
[BD-V]: The audio is output as 5.1ch when “7.1ch Audio Reformatting” in the Setup menu (> 93) is set to “Off”.
[BD-V]: The audio output is amplified from 5.1ch or 6.1ch to 7.1ch depending on the DTS, Inc. specifications regardless of the setting of ”7.1ch
Audio Reformatting” in the setup menu (> 93).
With PCM output, Dolby Digital EX becomes PCM audio decoded as Dolby Digital, DTS-ES recorded to DVD-Video becomes PCM audio
decoded as DTS Digital Surround, and DTS-ES recorded to BD-Video becomes PCM audio decoded as DTS-ES.
[BD-V]: When “BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “On”, Dolby Digital EX is output as Dolby Digital and DTS-ES is output as DTS Digital
Surround, however if playing BD-Video without secondary audio or clicking sound, the audio is output as the original format.
[Note]
≥When setting “BD-Video Secondary Audio” to “Off”, the clicking sound on the menu and audio with secondary video in picture-in-picture mode
(> 46) cannot be output.
Regarding 24p output
Many BD-Video movie contents are recorded in 24 frames/second in accordance with the film materials. However, they will normally be output in
60 frames/second in accordance with the display format.
These can be output in 24p as the original. Therefore, high-quality video can be enjoyed, such as the improved clarity, enhanced perspective, etc.
Preparation
≥Connect to a TV supporting 1080/24p input via an HDMI cable.
≥Set “BD-Video 24p Output” to “On”. (> 93)
RQT9434
47
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
Editing
48 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Editing titles
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM]
[BD-R] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.)
[+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] Only “Properties” is possible.
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Press [3, 4] to select the title.
e.g., [HDD]
Editing of the title can be performed with this unit.
For example, an unrequired part of the title can be deleted. (> 49,
Partial Delete)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Titles)
All
Not Viewed
ZDF
KiKa
ZDFdokuk
3 sat
ZDF
Movie
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
OK
RETURN
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
Video (AVCHD)
Titles 4
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
Page 001/002
OPTION
Select
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
Select “BD” for any discs.
≥[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] Release protection (> 84, Setting the
protection).
Sports
Helicopter Informationen
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Berge und Flüsse
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
KiKa
DV
[Note]
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
≥[BD-R] [+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved
to the free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the
amount of free space decreases.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
≥With titles that are copyright protected (Copying is prohibited), you
cannot perform editing other than Delete, Properties. (> 31)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Social/Economi
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Delete Title
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4] and press the “Red” button. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press the “Red” button again to
cancel.
3
4
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
Enter Title Name
Set up Protection
Play from the Beginning
Cancel Protection
Play from Last Viewed
Partial Delete
Delete Title
Divide Title
Properties
Change Thumbnail
Edit
DR File Conversion
Chapter View
Edit or playback the chapter (> 51)
Create Group
To edit the group of titles [HDD] (> 42)
Release Grouping
All Titles
Switching of the Navigator [HDD] (> 41)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9434
48
Refer to “Title
operations”
(> 49, 50).
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
49 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (> 48)
Delete Title§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] ≥The available recording space on BD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you
delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (> 25).
Properties
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R]
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
e.g., [HDD]
Properties
Dinosaur
Date
29.05.2009(Fri)
Channel ZDF
Start Time 12:19
Rec Time 0:30 (SP)
Genre
News
Enter Title Name
You can give names to recorded titles.
(> 80, Entering text)
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R]
≥[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW]
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
All
Not Viewed
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
ZDF
29.10(W
ZDF
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
(> below, For your reference)
1 Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
Partial Delete
HDD Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Not viewed
France 2 HD -
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Continue” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
News
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Start
DU COURAGE “LETRANGE MONSIEUR PIER
End
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to start the playback when the title is paused.
≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections. Up to 20 sections
can be set. (> go to step 1)
Movie
Ancient wild
Start
- -:- -.- -
DV
Start22:46 Time0:01(DR)
20.03(Thu)
Star Academy
04.10(Sat)
KD2A
04.10(Sat)
FAN DE
29.10(Wed)
LIVE MAG
29.10(Wed)
LIVE MAG
29.10(Wed)
ACTU and CO
29.10(Wed)
ACTU and CO
01.01(Thu)
DV 21.02.02
Next
Continue
0:43.21
Please set the start
point with playback
operation and skip.
End
- -:- -.- -
PLAY
Page 001/002
OK
RETURN
OPTION
RETURN
Select
Previous
Time Slip
Next
Edit Title
Delete
Title
Manual
Skip
HDD
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
≥Chapter Mark is generated in the scene that was partially deleted.
4 Press [RETURN
Editing
Partial Delete
].
≥You cannot perform this operation when you select the radio programme.
Divide Title
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
(> below, For your reference)
You can divide a title into two.
1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Continue” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
Divide Title
Not viewed
Movie
PLAY
Ancient wild
IDF1
News
Sports
DU COURAGE “LETRANGE MONSIEUR PIER
29.10(Wed)
Start22:46 Time0:01(DR)
Preview
NRJ Paris
20.03(Thu)
Star Academy
France 2 HD -
04.10(Sat)
KD2A
NRJ Paris
04.10(Sat)
FAN DE
NRJ Paris
29.10(Wed)
LIVE MAG
NRJ Paris
29.10(Wed)
LIVE MAG
CAP 24
29.10(Wed)
ACTU and CO
CAP 24
29.10(Wed)
ACTU and CO
DV
01.01(Thu)
DV 21.02.02
To confirm the division point
Divide
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays
- -:- -.- OK
10 seconds before and after the division point.)
RETURN
Time Slip
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the
point where you want to divide the title.
[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the title name and copy-restriction of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
≥[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.
≥You cannot perform this operation when you select the radio programme.
Continue
0:00.22
PLAY
RETURN
Page 001/002
OPTION
Previous
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(> below, For your reference)
Next
Edit Title
Select
Change Thumbnail
Video (AVCHD)
Divide
Delete
Title
Manual
Skip
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] It is possible to change the image displayed on the top menu after finalising.
[+RW] It is possible to change the image displayed on the top menu after creating Top Menu.
[HDD] Settings for the “Change Thumbnail” is saved when high speed copy
is performed to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
+R DL or +RW.
Change Thumbnail
IDF1
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at the
point you want to change.
Movie
News
Sports
Start22:46 Time0:01(DR)
NRJ Paris
20.03(Thu)
Star Academy
France 2 HD -
04.10(Sat)
KD2A
NRJ Paris
04.10(Sat)
FAN DE
NRJ Paris
29.10(Wed)
LIVE MAG
NRJ Paris
29.10(Wed)
LIVE MAG
CAP 24
29.10(Wed)
ACTU and CO
Finish
0:00.00
CAP 24
Start play
and
29.10(Wed)
ACTU
andselect
CO
DV
a thumbnail.
01.01(Thu)
DV 21.02.02
Change
- -:- -.- -
the image of
PLAY
Page 001/002
OK
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
Select
Video (AVCHD)
Change
DU COURAGE “LETRANGE MONSIEUR PIER
29.10(Wed)
1 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2 Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
thumbnail is shown.
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Not viewed
Ancient wild
Previous
Time Slip
Edit Title
Next
Delete
Title
Manual
Skip
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
≥You cannot perform this operation when you select the radio programme.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use Search (> 39), Time Slip (> 40) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (> 39) and Frame-by-frame (> 40).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
RQT9434
49
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
50 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Editing titles
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (> 48)
DR File Conversion
DR File Conversion is a function to convert the recording mode of the
title in DR mode. The size of the converted title will be small regularly.
[HDD]
(Converting the recording mode) It will take about the same time as playback of the title to convert the
recording mode.
1 Press [2, 1] to select recording mode and press
[4].
2 Press [2, 1] to select whether to record the
subtitle or not and press [4].
DR File Conversion
Convert the selected title by changing its recording mode.
Please select recording mode and other options, then press OK.
Recording Mode
XP - - High Quality
Subtitles
Timing
Off
During standby
OK
RETURN
“Automatic”
Subtitles will be recorded for titles with subtitles.
You cannot switch the subtitle on or off during the playback.
“Off”
Subtitle will not be recorded.
3 Press [2, 1] to select when to start the conversion and press [OK].
“Now”
Conversion begins immediately after step 5.
Recording and playback are not available during conversion. Note also
that Timer recording will not be performed during conversion.
“During standby”
The conversion will be performed a short time after the unit is turned off in
a time slot for which no timer recording is set. If the power is switched on
during the conversion, the conversion will be cancelled, and start from the
beginning when the power is next switched off.
4 Press [2, 1] to select whether to delete the original title after the conversion or
not and press [OK].
“Convert & Delete”
The original title will be deleted to save HDD capacity after conversion.
“Convert Only”
The original title remains after conversion.
≥The original title in DR format will be deleted after DR File Conversion when a title that is copyright
protected (One generation copy is permitted) is selected.
5 To begin the conversion “Now”:
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
≥To cancel a conversion that is in progress
Press and hold [RETURN ] for more than 3 seconds.
To begin the conversion “During standby”:
Press [OK].
≥To remove a conversion setting
After performing steps 1–3 (> 48)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “DR File Conversion” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥Conversion begins soon after the unit is turned off.
“COPY” on the unit’s display remains lighted during conversion. [Only when the “Unit’s Display” in the
Setup menu is set to “Bright” (> 92).]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Titles)
All
Not viewed
ZDF
KiKa
ZDFdokuk
3 sat
ZDF
PLAY
RETURN
RQT9434
50
HDD
Social/Economi
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Berge und Flüsse
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Helicopter Informationen
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec time0:01(DR XP)
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
KiKa
DV
Select
Movie
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
OPTION
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
Page 001/002
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Delete Title
When “DR > ±± (Recording mode for
conversion)” is displayed in the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR, the conversion has not
finished.
[Note]
≥To use “DR File Conversion”, the HDD needs enough storage capacity. Please make space available on the
HDD.
≥The size of the converted title may increase for some combinations of programme and recording mode.
≥DR File Conversion is stopped when the power is turned on while the recording mode is converting with
power turned off. Conversion will start from the beginning again once the power is turned off.
≥The converted one of a title including multiple video and audio content will contain only single video and
audio content. The “Preferred Language” setting in the Setup menu (> 89) is applied.
≥During the conversion “Now” with “Subtitles” set to “Automatic” in step 2, you cannot turn off the subtitle
displayed on the television.
≥Teletext will not be recorded.
≥When recording to DVD disc with XP mode, select the audio to record with “Audio Mode for XP Recording”
before converting the recording mode. (> 92)
≥Select the audio to record when converting to “HG”, “HX”, “HE”, or “HL” mode. (> 92, Audio Channels for
HG / HX / HE / HL Recording)
≥In titles with the Auto Renewal Recording function (> 36) set, a programme may be unintentionally
converted while in “During standby”.
So it is recommended to convert the recording mode by selecting “Now”.
≥The aspect ratio will be recorded in accordance with “Aspect for Recording” of the Setup menu, regardless of
the recording mode for conversion. (> 90)
When converting to “XP”, “SP”, “LP” or “EP” mode, the title will be recorded with original aspect ratio if “Rec
for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”. (> 90)
≥Regarding titles recorded from radio service
The data size of the title recorded from radio service will be larger after converted for copy.
It is recommended that you keep them in DR mode.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
51 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter
Chapter
Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
2
3
4
To start play > Press [OK].
To edit > Step 5.
To create > Press the “Green” button. (> below, Create
Chapter)
“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 90)
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R]
“Automatic”:
Detects changes in the scene (like the start and the end of the
programme) during recording and sets chapter start points on
them automatically.
≥Depending on the programme to be recorded or the
Recording Mode, the chapter start points may not be created
correctly.
“5 minutes”:
Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at
approximately 5-minute interval.
≥Chapters will not be created:
– when recording a radio broadcast
– when recording from the AV Input or DV input
Chapter View
Not viewed
Create Chapter Mark
≥Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
HDD
Time Remaining
45:54 (DR)
News
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Chapter View screen
Play
DU COURAGE “LETRANGE
MONSIEUR
PIER
Press OK to start
playing from
29.10(Wed)
001
Start22:46 Time0:01(DR)
the selected chapter.
5
Selected chapter can be edited
NRJ Paris
20.03(Thu)
Star
via Academy
OPTION.
France 2 HD -
04.10(Sat)
Press RETURN to go back to
KD2A
NRJ Paris
04.10(Sat)
previous
menu.
FAN
DE
NRJ Paris
29.10(Wed)
LIVE MAG
NRJ Paris
29.10(Wed)
LIVE MAG
CAP 24
29.10(Wed)
ACTU and CO
CAP 24
29.10(Wed)
ACTU and CO
DV
01.01(Thu)
DV 21.02.02
0:00.00
OK
OPTION
RETURN OPTION
Edit Chapter Mark
Select
0:12.29
Page 001/002
Page
001/001
Previous
Next
Manual
SkipTitle
Delete
Edit Title
Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Delete Chapter
Combine Chapters
Refer to “Chapter operations”.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
[Note]
≥You cannot perform this operation when you select the radio
programme.
During the playback or pause
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
Movie
SOCCER
≥The maximum number of chapters on a disc:
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[HDD] : Approx. 1000 per title
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] : Approx. 1000 per disc
[Note]
≥[HDD] You will not be able to perform the Resume play function
(> 39) or the “Change Thumbnail” (> 49) with a title with the
maximum number of chapters.
≥[HDD] Chapter Marks created will be maintained when copied or
used “DR File Conversion”. But, it will not maintain the exceeded
amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers.
Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Chapter View”
and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select the chapter.
Editing
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Only playback of
chapter is possible.
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–4 (> left)
Create
Chapter
Select the point where you want to start a new
chapter while viewing the title.
Chapter View
Not viewed
N
Movie
HDD
Time Remaining
45:54 (DR)
News
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Play
SOCCER
DU COURAGE “LETRANGE MONSIEUR PIER
29.10(Wed)
29.10(W
To insert chapter position,
Start22:46 Time0:01(DR)
press OK at selected time.
Chapter has been created.
NRJ Paris
20.03(Thu)
Star
Academy
Press
RETURN to go to
France 2 HD -
04.10(Sat)
Chapter View.
KD2A
NRJ Paris
04.10(Sat)
FAN DE
NRJ Paris
29.10(Wed)
LIVE MAG
NRJ Paris
29.10(Wed)
LIVE MAG
CAP 24
29.10(Wed)
ACTU and CO
CAP 24
29.10(Wed)
ACTU and CO
DV
01.01(Thu)
DV 21.02.02
OK
RETURN OPTION
Time Slip
∫ To delete the Chapter Mark
1 While paused
Press [:, 9] and skip to the location you
want to delete.
2 Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
0:01.22
Page 001/002
Previous
Create Chapter
Edit Title
Next
Manual
SkipTitle
Delete
1 Press [OK] at the point you want
to divide.
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
2 Press [RETURN ] to go to
Chapter View screen.
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
Editing and playing chapters
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or BD drive.
Select “BD” for any discs. BD indicator will light up.
≥[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] Release protection (> 84, Setting the
protection).
1
Delete
Chapter§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
and press [OK].
Combine
Chapters
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine”
and press [OK].
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Titles)
All
Not Viewed
ZDF
KiKa
ZDFdokuk
3 sat
ZDF
Select
HDD
Social/Economi
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
29.10(Wed)
01.01(Thu)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
Sports
Video (AVCHD)
Helicopter Informationen
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Soccer Digest
Berge und Flüsse
29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46
ZDFdokuk
KiKa
KiKa
DV
OK
RETURN
Movie
20.03(Thu)
04.10(Sat)
04.10(Sat)
29.10(Wed)
Titles 4
Die Rückkehr der Zombies
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
Ausgebildet in der Antarktis
DV 21.02.02
Page 001/002
OPTION
Previous
Edit Title
Next
Delete Title
§
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are
lost and cannot be restored. Make certain
before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (> below) when
you only want to delete the division point
between chapters. (The recorded contents
will not be deleted.)
≥The selected chapter and following chapter
are combined.
Multiple editing is possible.
Select with [2, 1] and press the “Red” button. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears.
Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
RQT9434
51
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
Copying
52 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Copying titles
There are following copying methods.
Copy Title Playing
Copy
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc. (> 55)
Make a copying list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles in the way you want. (> 56)
High definition video (AVCHD format) can be copied from disc, SD card, or USB. (> 62)
∫ Copy direction
Copy source
Copy destination
Possible copying
method
Copy speed
[HDD]
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Copy Title Playing
Copy
≥The high speed copy may not be
possible depending on the destination
disc or the title to copy. (> 54, When
is high speed copy not possible?)
[BD-RE]
[BD-R]
[HDD]
Copy
Normal speed
[RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
[HDD]
Copy
High speed
[+RW]
[HDD]
Copy
Normal speed
Before finalise
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL]
[DVD-V]
After finalise
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL]
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
≥From an SD card or
Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. (from USB)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
≥From discs
HD Video (AVCHD format)
≥From an SD card or
Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. (from USB)
Cannot copy
[HDD]
Copy
Normal speed
[HDD] [RAM]
Copy
High speed
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Cannot copy
[HDD]
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
High speed
[HDD]
[BD-RE] [BD-R]
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
High speed
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Cannot copy
[Note]
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been treated so, cannot be copied using this
unit.
RQT9434
52
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
53 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
∫ Copy speed
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
Copy with shorter time than the recorded time of the
title with same quality (recording mode).
It will take same or longer time as the recorded time
of the copying title.
≥Even if you select a recording mode with better
picture quality than the original, the picture quality
does not improve.
≤§1
≤§1
≤
≤§2
≤§3
–
Features
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails
maintained?
Recording and Playing
while Copying
§1
§2
§3
Position of the chapter might shift slightly.
It will not maintain the exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers on a disc.
– [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : Approx. 1000
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Approx. 254
(Depends on the state of recording.)
Position of the thumbnails might shift slightly. (May not be maintained depending on the state of recording.)
Possible only with titles on the HDD
[However it is not possible when copying with finalisation, creating Top Menu or when copying SD Video (MPEG2 format) or when copying HD
Video (AVCHD format).]
– You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
– Still pictures or music cannot be played.
Maximum writing speed of discs
BD-RE (DL):
2x Speed
DVD-RAM:
5x Speed
+R:
8x Speed
BD-RE:
2x Speed
DVD-R:
12x Speed
+R DL:
4x Speed
BD-R (DL):
6x Speed
DVD-R DL:
4x Speed
+RW:
4x Speed
BD-R:
6x Speed
DVD-RW:
4x Speed
Approx.
6X Speed BD-R
(DL, 50 GB/SL, 25 GB)
HDD
Recording Mode
Recorded Programme
HL
1 hour
1
Required time
Speed
1 min. 24 s.
43x
Copying
Copying speed when copying from the HDD to BD-R in High Speed Copy
[Note]
≥The above rate in the list indicates the shortest time and fastest speed required for copying one-hour title from HDD to the disc by High-Speed
copying.
≥The required amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area where information is written or unique feature
on the disc.
∫ Copying titles that are copyright protected
Copying not restricted
≥There are titles that can only be handled by HDD, BD-RE, BD-R, or DVD-RAM (CPRM compatible discs only).
One generation copy is permitted
≥You can copy to BD-RE, BD-R or DVD-RAM (CPRM compatible discs only) only once.
However, the original title will be deleted. (> 31, 118)
≥You cannot copy to a DVD-RAM (not compatible with CPRM), DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You cannot copy from the copied disc to another disc.
Copying is prohibited
≥You cannot copy to disc.
RQT9434
53
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
54 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Copying titles
∫ Frequently asked questions
When is high speed copy not possible?
It will copy at normal speed in following cases:
≥Copying XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR mode title to BD-RE or BD-R
≥Copying to DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW in following
conditions:
– Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode
– Title of the AVCHD copied to the HDD
≥Copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW in following conditions:
– Copy including a title that was recorded to HDD with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to
“Off” (> 90)
– Titles that contain many deleted segments.
– Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or a Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. with HDD (SD Video) (> 63).
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”
mode.
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR (recordings
5 hours or longer)” mode
≥Setting the “Recording Mode” to anything but “High Speed” in “Copy”
≥Copying from BD-RE, BD-R or +RW to HDD
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] When copying from the finalised disc to HDD
When copying titles in high speed mode to
high speed recording compatible discs
The sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )” in “BD / DVD Speed for
High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 90).
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When copying to disc in normal speed
mode
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the
HDD and then copied at high speed to the disc. The titles that were temporarily copied to
the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to the disc in the following cases.
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new blank disc, if
you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free
space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be copied to
the disc is greater than 999 in total.
When stopping the copy during copy
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If copy is cancelled during the step while temporarily
copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the
step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point
cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the BD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.
RQT9434
54
Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card,
or USB memory after copying HD video
(AVCHD format) to the HDD?
≥It can be copied to the disc.
– [BD-RE] [BD-R] It can be copied with HD quality.
– [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] It will be copied with SD quality. (It cannot be
copied as it is in HD picture quality.)
≥It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.
Regarding titles recorded in DR mode from
radio service
≥Picture data will be added to the titles recorded in DR mode from radio service when
copying them in HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode or converting them to these
recording modes using “DR File Conversion”. Therefore, the data size will be larger after
copying or “DR File Conversion”.
– If you are going to copy the titles to disc with least audio degradation
It is recommended that you select LP mode.
– If you are going to copy the titles to disc with least data size
It is recommended that you select them to EP (8 hours) mode.
≥Title recorded from radio service cannot be copied in DR mode.
MPEG-2 or AVCHD files are not recognised
≥Only MPEG2 or AVCHD recorded or edited on a Panasonic’s video camera will be
recognised. MPEG2 or AVCHD recorded or edited to USB memory or an SD card using
devices other than a Panasonic’s video camera may not be recognised.
55 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Copy Title Playing
Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc.
≥It will start copying from the beginning of the title regardless of the
playing position.
[HDD] > [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
1
Playback the title to copy.
午後４時２１分
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE or HL modes
Copy destination
Copy Speed
Recording mode
[BD-RE] [BD-R]
High speed§
Same as title to be
copied§
[RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Normal speed
FR
§
When copying the title in DR mode with multiple audio,
subtitles and Teletext
[BD-RE] [BD-R]
≥Audio, subtitles and Teletext can be copied as is.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Only the audio selected in the “Multi Audio” in the Disc menu
will be copied for the multiple audio. (> 81).
≥Subtitle displayed during playback will be copied.
Press [STTL ] to display the subtitle.
Select the subtitle with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu (> 81)
≥Teletext displayed during playback will be copied.
Press [TEXT ] to display the Teletext.
2
3
4
When copying over the available space on the disc, one from HG,
HX, HE, or HL modes will be selected to match the available
space, and it will be copied with normal speed.
≥When copying at normal speed, only the audio selected in the
“Multi Audio” in the Disc menu will be copied for the multiple
audio. (> 81)
≥When copying at normal speed, subtitle displayed during
playback will be copied.
Press [STTL ] to display the subtitle.
Select the subtitle with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu (> 81)
≥When copying at normal speed, Teletext displayed during
playback will be copied.
Press [TEXT ] to display the Teletext.
Titles in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR modes
Copy destination
Copy Speed
Recording mode
[BD-RE] [BD-R]
Normal speed
Recording mode of
playing back title§1
[RAM]
High speed§1
Same as title to be
copied§1
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
High speed§1, §2
Same as title to be
copied§1
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Title
Playing” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN
] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
Press [OK] to disappear the screen display.
≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
[Note]
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the HDD
regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying)
§1
§2
When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space,
copy will perform at normal speed in FR mode.
Titles that were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 90)
set to “Off” will be copied with normal speed.
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in
“EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source and the “Aspect for
Recording” (> 90) setting do not match.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
Copying
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R
and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after
copy (> 86). To play +RW on other players, we recommend you
create top menu (> 86), but they may not play on all DVD players.
RQT9434
55
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
56 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Copying titles
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press the “Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
≥Titles indicated with “
” can not be copied in high
speed mode.
≥To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
4 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> 57)
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
(> 57) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not
sufficient).
5 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying using the copying list—Copy
You can order titles as desired for copy to disc.
[HDD] ,-. [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
When copying the title in DR mode with multiple audio and
subtitles
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [HDD]
≥When copying at high speed, audio and subtitles can be copied as
is.
≥When copying at normal speed, only the audio and subtitles
selected in the “Preferred Language” in the Setup menu will be
copied for the multiple audio and subtitles. (> 89)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Only the audio and subtitles selected in the “Preferred Language”
in the Setup menu will be copied for the multiple audio and
subtitles. (> 89).
6
1
While stopped
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
≥If you are not going to change these settings (> step 7)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Other Settings” and press [1].
“Subtitles”
(Only when copying titles in DR mode and the recording mode
other than High Speed is selected)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Subtitles” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Automatic” or “Off” and press [OK].
≥“Automatic”:
Subtitle selected in the “Preferred Language“ in the Setup
menu (> 89) will be copied.
≥“Off”:
Subtitle in the source titles will not be copied.
“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”
([HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] only)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” or “Create Top Menu” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
≥If “On” is selected
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
– [+RW] Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before
playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy
Cancel All
Source
HDD
Direction
1 Copy
HDD BD / DVD
Destination
2
Copy Mode
3
Create List
VIDEO High Speed
BD / DVD
Information of the copy destination
- BD-RE
- Copy restricted titles can be
copied on to disc
0
Start Copying
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
≥If you are not going to change the each setting (> step 7).
3
Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction
(> step 4).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“BD/DVD”, or vice versa. (> step 6)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
4
Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode
(> step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
5
Register titles for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
Copy
Cancel All
Direction
1 Copy
HDD BD / DVD
2
Copy Mode
3
Create List
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB ( 0% )
Title
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
VIDEO High Speed
0
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
OPTION
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Create List Grouped Titles
HDD
Date
Channel
25.05
01.01 AV2
01.01 AV1
Time
Title Name
12:36 Soccer Digest
1:35
1:13
Titles
2
1
1
Time
12:36
Rec time
0:52(SP)
Page 001/001
OK
RETURN
RQT9434
56
OPTION
Select
Set other settings.
7
8
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 7
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising or creating Top Menu)
Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising or creating Top
Menu).
Press [OK] to disappear the screen display.
≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
[Note]
≥Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
simultaneously.
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the HDD
regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising or creating Top
Menu)
57 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Copying list icons and functions
Copying list indicators
Titles that cannot be copied in high speed mode to
the inserted disc
Title contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Title recorded using a different encoding system
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
unit.
≥Titles displaying these marks cannot be selected.
Data size of each registered item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB ( 0% )
No.
Title
Size
New item (Total=0)
Page 01/01
Size:
Data size recorded to the copy destination
≥When copying at normal speed, the total
data size will change according to the
recording mode.
≥The total data size shown may be larger
than the sum of the data sizes for each
registered item, because of data
management information being written to
the copy destination, etc.
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy
(> 86). To play +RW on other players, we recommend you create
top menu (> 86), but they may not play on all DVD players.
午後４時２１分
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort
Copying list
After performing step 5–2 (> 56)
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[OPTION].
Properties
Sort
Grouped Titles
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [OK].
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
Sort (All Titles screen only):
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the Copying list screen, the display order is cancelled.
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item after step 5–4 (> 56)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[OK].
Delete All
Add
Delete
Move
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press the “Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
2 Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].
Copying
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (> 56)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
RQT9434
57
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
58 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Copying titles
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 90) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (> 90) of the Setup menu.
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal
copying, and cannot be copied.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalised disc (> 15).
After performing steps 1–4 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVDVideo”) (> 56, Copying using the copying list—Copy)
1
Set “Copy Time”.
≥If you are not going to change the setting (> step 2).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
Direction
1 Copy
BD / DVD HDD
2
3
Copy Mode
2
Hour
00
Min.
DVD-Video SP
Copy Time
Set the time a few minutes longer.
2:00
Start Copying
OK
Press OK to change the setting.
RETURN
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (> 86).
RQT9434
58
When the top menu is displayed
My favorite
01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
05
06
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 3
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying after step 3
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
[Note]
≥The screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press
[1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording
format), create a copy list and then copy (> 56, Copying using the
copying list—Copy).
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
59 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Recording broadcasts from external equipment
Recording disc: [HDD]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP
Preparation
≥Connect a Set Top Box to this unit’s input terminals (> 101).
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 93).
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1
2
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
≥DR, HG, HX, HE, HL and FR mode cannot be selected.
3
4
Select the channel on the other
equipment.
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
[Note]
≥It will be recorded in standard definition quality even if the
programme is in high definition.
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), this function does not work.
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (Set Top Box) — EXT LINK
Recording disc: [HDD]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP
To record programmes from Set Top Box using timer programming
Preparation
≥Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this unit to the
Scart terminal of a Set Top Box with a 21-pin Scart cable (> 101).
≥Set “AV2 Input” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (> 94).
≥Set “Ext Link” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (> 94).
1
2
Make timer programming on the
external equipment.
Press [EXT LINK].
≥“EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer
recording standby has been activated.
≥The guidance information of EXT LINK appears.
To set external link standby using the FUNCTION MENU display
Perform step 1 (> above)
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Ext Link Standby” and press [OK].
To cancel the external control
1 Turn on this unit.
2 Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer
recording standby. (“EXT-L” disappears.)
[Note]
≥It will be recorded in standard definition quality even if the
programme is in high definition.
≥During EXIT LINK standby mode or recording, you cannot press
[INPUT SELECT] to select external input other than AV2.
≥In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to
cancel the setting after recording is finished.
≥This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” in
the Setup menu (> 93).
≥This function does not work when recording from an external input
other than AV2.
≥This function does not work while recording 2 programmes
simultaneously with timer recording.
≥This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in
some cases.
≥When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if
the input signal is NTSC system.
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (> 49).
≥While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, AV1
output terminal outputs the signal which is input from the AV2 input
terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output” setting (> 94).
≥During EXIT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is
available on both HDD and BD drive. However, during EXIT LINK
recording, BD-Video, still pictures or music cannot be played back.
≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display, Direct TV Recording is
unavailable.
Copying
Recording from Set Top Box
With Other
Equipment
With Other
Equipment
RQT9434
59
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
60 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Copying from a video equipment (video cassette recorder, etc.)
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
AV3 IN
This unit
DV IN
VIDEO
L/MONO-AUDIO-R
Manual recording
Recording disc: [HDD]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
≥When recording bilingual programmes, select “M1” or “M2” on the
external equipment.
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 93).
1
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4pin)
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
Audio/Video
cable§
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
Other video equipment
2
§
Connect to terminals of the same colour.
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”
in the Setup menu (> 92).
≥When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video
camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape
only.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 90) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (> 90) of the Setup menu.
16:9 image such as wide broadcasting (> 32)
[Note]
≥If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then
the video quality will be degraded.
≥While copying from DV input or executing the “Flexible Recording
via AV input” (> 61)
– Copy will stop when timer recording starts.
– Chasing playback, simultaneous rec and play, switching of the
broadcast or input cannot be performed.
60
Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
≥DR, HG, HX, HE, HL and FR mode cannot be selected.
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
RQT9434
While stopped
3
4
Start play on the other equipment.
When you want to start recording
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Almost all videos and BD-Video/DVD-Video on sale have been
treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software (firmware) that
has been so treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
[Note]
When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), this function does not work.
61 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
DV Automatic Recording
Recording disc: [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP
Preparation
1 Turn off this unit and DV equipment, then connect the equipment
with the unit’s DV input terminal (> 60).
2 Turn on this unit.
≥If you record to a disc, insert a disc (> 15).
≥[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection
(> 84, Setting the protection).
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 93).
1
午後４時２１分
Flexible Recording via AV input
Recording disc: [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Recording mode: FR
It is possible to record from equipment connected to the AV input
terminals.
Preparation
≥[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection
(> 84, Setting the protection).
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 93).
1
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
Turn on the DV equipment, and pause
play at the point you want recording to
start.
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
The following screen appears.
DV Automatic Recording
Record from the DV unit?
Rec to HDD
Rec to Blu-ray Disc/DVD
2
3
OK
RETURN
≥When the screen is not displayed
After performing step 1
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “DV Automatic Recording” and
press [OK].
> Go to step 2
2
4
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Rec to HDD”
or “Rec to Blu-ray Disc / DVD” and
press [OK].
8 hour 00 min.
Set recording time
Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
8 Hour
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the unit
off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (> 60).
00 Min.
Start
Cancel
OK
RETURN
6
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
[Note]
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), this function does not work.
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., Panasonic’s video camera,
etc.) can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
≥It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV
equipment.
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
≥[-R] [+R] It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times
of step 4 or recording or editing.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] After finalising, chapters for every 5 minutes will be
created.
≥[+R] After finalising, chapters for every 8 minutes will be created.
≥[+RW] Regardless of creating top menu, chapters for every
8 minutes will be created.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible
Recording via AV input” and press
[OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Rec to HDD”
or “Rec to Blu-ray Disc / DVD” and
press [OK].
Flexible Recording via AV input
Please set recording time. Record in FR mode.
Maximum recording time
≥DR, HG, HX, HE, HL and FR mode cannot be selected.
4
While stopped
≥It may take a while for the next screen to display while
preparing to record.
≥It may take a while for the next screen to display while
preparing to record.
3
While stopped
Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
recording time.
With Other
Equipment
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
≥You cannot record more than maximum recording time.
7
8
Start play on the other equipment.
When you want to start recording
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN ].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
[Note]
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), this function does not work.
≥[-R] [+R] It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times
of step 8 or recording or editing.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] After finalising, chapters for every 5 minutes will be
created.
≥[+R] After finalising, chapters for every 8 minutes will be created.
≥[+RW] Regardless of creating top menu, chapters for every
8 minutes will be created.
RQT9434
61
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
62 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format) or the SD Video (MPEG2 format)
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format)
It is possible to copy the HD video (AVCHD format) recorded on the Panasonic’s video camera, etc. to the HDD or disc.
∫ From an SD card or Discs
∫ From a video equipment
[AVCHD] (Disc) > [HDD]
[AVCHD] (SD card) > [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R]
HDD of Panasonic’s video camera, etc. > [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R]
≥You cannot playback HD Video in the HDD of Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or disc.
HDD
HDD
HDD
BD-RE BD-R
BD-RE BD-R
1
USB connection cable
(specified cable such as accessory of the USB
equipment)
Insert a disc or card.
e.g., [SD]
Preparation
Turn on both this unit and the Panasonic’s video camera, etc.
SD Card
1
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
2
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video
( AVCHD )” and press [OK].
Connect the Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. to this unit.
Select the appropriate mode that
makes the Panasonic’s video camera
ready for data transfer (such as “PC
CONNECT”) on the Panasonic’s video
camera, etc.
≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
USB
When copying from an SD card
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to HDD”
or “Copy to Blu-ray Disc” and press
[OK].
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
SD
HDD
Time 18:19
Rec time
0:10
Size
120 MB
No.
001
002
003
004
Destination Capacity: 472583MB
Size:
0MB( 0%)
Date Day
25.05
25.05
01.01
01.01
Channel Time
SAT
SAT
SUN
SUN
Total :
0
Title Name
12:36
12:37
1:35
1:13
Page 01/01
OK
RETURN
4
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the
USB device.
3
4
OPTION
Select
Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press the “Red” button.
5
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
5
6
Press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
It will automatically format the unformatted disc, such as new
disc, when copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN
RQT9434
62
] for 3 seconds.
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 [BD-RE] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Press [3, 4] to select “Blu-ray Disc / DVD” and press [OK].
[SD]
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video
( AVCHD )” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to HDD”
or “Copy to Blu-ray Disc” and press
[OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press the “Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
6
7
Press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
It will automatically format the unformatted disc, such as new
disc, when copying.
[Note]
≥Record, playback, or timer recording cannot be executed while
copying.
≥Copy cannot be executed while recording or playback.
≥An AVCHD title with more than 100 scenes will be divided into titles
every 99th scene and copied.
≥Copied video will be displayed as “AVCHD” in the “Channel”
column of the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
≥Depending on the recording condition with the high definition
camera, scenes recorded on same day might have different titles
(“-1”, “-2” appended to date).
≥See the instructions of the equipment used to record.
≥After copying AVCHD to HDD, it can be copied to DVDs with
standard definition quality. It is not recommended to delete original
AVCHD.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
63 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format)
It is possible to copy the SD video (MPEG2 format) recorded on the Panasonic video camera, etc. to the HDD or disc.
∫ From an SD card
∫ From a video equipment
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
HDD of Panasonic’s video camera > [HDD] [RAM]
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
HDD
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
1
Insert a card.
USB connection cable
(specified cable such as accessory of the USB
equipment)
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Preparation
Turn on both this unit and the camera.
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
1
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the
card.
2
3
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video
( MPEG2 )” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list—Copy” (> 56)
Please set the items in step 3 and 4 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source : SD CARD
Copy Mode:
Format : VIDEO
USB
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the
USB device.
≥SD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the
copy list.
4
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
Connect the Panasonic’s video
camera, etc. to this unit.
Select the appropriate mode that
makes the Panasonic’s video camera,
etc. ready for data transfer (such as
“PC CONNECT”) on the Panasonic’s
video camera, etc.
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video
( MPEG2 )” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list—Copy” (> 56)
Please set the items in step 3 and 4 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source : USB
Copy Mode:
Format : VIDEO
With Other
Equipment
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
≥SD Video on the Panasonic’s video camera, etc. are
automatically registered on the copy list.
5
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN
] for 3 seconds.
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 [SD]
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
[Note]
≥You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card or in the HDD of the
Panasonic’s video camera, etc. with this unit. You must copy the
files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
RQT9434
63
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
64 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Playing still pictures
Still pictures
Still pictures
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]
≥You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a BD-RE,
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW, USB memory and SD card.
≥You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.
1
3
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album of “Album” or date of “Pictures
by Date” and press [OK].
≥Picture list screen is displayed.
[HDD]
e.g., [HDD]
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Picture View
[BD-RE] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]
Pictures by Date
Insert the disc, the SD card or USB memory.
Picture list screen
04.02.2007
The display below automatically appears.
Disc
e.g., [CD]
CD
Page 001/001
OK
RETURN
Play Video ( DivX )
OPTION
Select
Slideshow
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Picture View screen icons
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Slect file type.
Picture and Album protected.
OK
RETURN
[HDD]
Date that has not yet been viewed
(Only still pictures copied with “Copy All Pictures
( JPEG )” or “Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )”)
[SD]
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
SD card is inserted.
OK
4
RETURN
[USB]
USB
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (> 65)
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
To return to previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Pictures
( JPEG )” and press [OK].
∫ Switching the Picture View appearance
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM]
Still pictures copied from SD cards and USB memories are
grouped by the shooting date on Pictures by Date screen.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “View Album” or “Pictures by Date”
and press [OK].
Picture View
Album
001
Total 19
Total 9
Press OK to display pictures.
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
Album screen
RQT9434
64
Picture View
002
Page 01/01
Slideshow
Pictures by Date
001
002
08.09.2006
Total 19
04.02.2007
Total 9
Press OK to display pictures.
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
Page 01/01
Slideshow
Pictures by Date screen
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
If the menu screen (> left) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 [BD-RE] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Press [3, 4] to select “Blu-ray Disc / DVD” and press [OK].
[SD]
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
65 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Useful functions during still picture play
Start
Slideshow
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or date.§
2 Press [1] (PLAY).
You can also start Slideshow with following steps.
After performing step 1 (> above)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and press [OK].
To end the slide show
Press [RETURN ].
Slideshow
Settings
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or date.§
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow Settings” and press [OK].
After completing the following settings, press [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select “Set” and press [OK].
≥To change the display interval
After performing steps 1–3
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Display Interval”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval.
e.g,
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Slideshow Settings
Please set the following functions.
Display Interval
Normal
Transition Effect
Fade
Repeat Play
On
Off
Soundtrack
≥To change the transition effect
Sample Soundtrack
Select Soundtrack
After performing steps 1–3
Set
Cancel
Set
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Transition Effect”.
RETURN
2 Press [2, 1] to select the transition effect.
“Fade”: Pictures are changed by fading out and fading in.
“Motion”: Pictures are changed by fading out and fading in, while it is enlarged, reduced, or moved up or down.
“Random”: In addition to the “Motion”, pictures are changed by various methods.
≥To set repeat play
After performing steps 1–3
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off”.
≥To playback the music
Sample music in this unit or music stored on the HDD (My Favourites or Playlists) (> 71) or the USB can be played
during the playback of the slideshow.
After performing steps 1–3
Select Soundtrack
e.g., [HDD]
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Soundtrack”.
Please select music playlist for soundtrack.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “On”.
Sample Soundtrack
≥To change the music to playback
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Soundtrack” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the music playlist and press [OK].
My Favourites
01
02
03
OK
RETURN
Rotate RIGHT While playing
Rotate LEFT 1 Press [OPTION].
e.g,
Rotate RIGHT
≥Rotation information will not be stored in the following cases.
Rotate LEFT
– [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures
– When disc or card is protected
– When played on other equipment
– When copying pictures
– When changing date
≥If you remove the SD card while the Picture View screen is displayed, picture rotation information may not be properly
stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the Picture View screen.
OK
RETURN
Zoom in
Zoom out
While playing
e.g,
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].
Rotate RIGHT
≥Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [OK] to resume the display size of the still
picture.
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The Zoom in information will not be stored.
≥This function is only available for small-sized still pictures.
Properties
Rotate LEFT
Zoom in
OK
RETURN
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or date and press
[OK].§
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture.
3 Press [OPTION].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press [OK].
While playing
Press [STATUS
e.g., [HDD]
Properties
Folder Picture\DCIM001\001
Name Image0001.JPG
No.
Date
Time
0001
27.05.2009 WED
11:00
Image Size 640 X 480
File Size 142 KB
OK
] twice.
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS ].
§
Still pictures
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].
To switch the “Album” or “Pictures by Date” (> 64, step 2)
RETURN
Shooting date
RQT9434
65
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
66 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Editing still pictures
4
Editing still pictures (JPEG)
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [SD]
≥Editing can be done in units of pictures, albums, or dates.
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CDR/CD-RW and USB memory.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
Select “BD” for any discs.
≥[BD-RE] [RAM] [SD] Release protection (> 11, 84, Setting the
protection).
1
Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
(e.g., [HDD] Pictures by Date)
Useful functions during still picture
play (> 65)
View Album
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Copy
Copy to Album
Copy to New Album
Change Date
Copy to Disc
Delete
[HDD]
Still pictures operation (> 67)
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
(e.g., [HDD] Album)
[BD-RE] [RAM] [SD]
Insert the disc or the SD card.
Disc
e.g., [RAM]
Start Slideshow
[SD]
DVD-RAM
Useful functions during still picture
play (> 65)
Pictures by Date
The menu is automatically displayed.
SD Card
Play Video
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy to Album
Slideshow Settings
Copy to New Album
Copy Album
Copy to Disc
Edit Album
Enter Album Name
Delete Album
Set up Protection
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Cancel Protection
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
DVD-RAM is inserted.
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
OK
Still pictures operation (> 67)
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Pictures
( JPEG )” and press [OK].
∫ Switching the Picture View appearance
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM]
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “View Album” or “Pictures by Date”
and press [OK].
(e.g., [HDD] Picture list in the Pictures by Date View)
Useful functions during still picture play
(> 65)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Copy to Album
Properties
Copy to New Album
Copy Pictures
Change Date
Edit Pictures
Set up Protection
Delete Pictures
Cancel Protection
Pictures by Date
e.g., [HDD]
Picture View
Pictures by Date screen
Pictures by Date
002
08.09.2006
Total 19
04.02.2007
Total 9
Press OK to display pictures.
OK
RETURN
3
Still pictures operation (> 67)
(e.g., [SD] Album)
001
Start Slideshow
Useful functions during still picture play
(> 65)
Slideshow Settings
Enter Album Name
OPTION
Select
Slideshow
Edit Album
Editing an album or date:
Still pictures operation (> 67)
(e.g., [SD] Picture list)
Editing a still picture:
1 Select the album or date which contains the
still picture to edit and press [OK].
Start Slideshow
e.g., [HDD]
Properties
Picture View
Album
001
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Delete Pictures
View Album
Total 9
Press OK to display pictures.
Useful functions during still picture play
(> 65)
Slideshow Settings
Edit Pictures
002
Total 19
Page 01/01
Slideshow
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press the “Red” button.
(Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press the “Red” button again to
cancel.
66
Cancel Protection
Delete Album
Select the album or date to be edited
and press [OPTION].
RQT9434
Set up Protection
Page 01/01
Still pictures operation (> 67)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
If the menu screen (> step 1) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 [BD-RE] [RAM]
Press [3, 4] to select “Blu-ray Disc / DVD” and press [OK].
[SD]
Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
67 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Still pictures operation
After performing steps 1–3 (> 66)
Copy to Album§
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM]
Copy the selected album, date, or pictures to an existing album.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the destination album and press [OK].
≥The destination album with protect setting cannot be copied to.
≥After copying, the screen shows the Album screen automatically.
Copy to New Album§
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM]
Copy the selected album, date, or pictures to new album.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
2 Press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No”and press [OK].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (> 80, Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
Date of the first recorded picture in the album becomes the album name automatically.
(If there is no information about the recording date, it will become “--.--.----”.)
≥After copying, the screen shows the Album screen automatically.
Copy to Disc
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
[HDD]
Copy to HDD
[BD-RE] [RAM]
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM]
(Pictures by Date only)
Enter Album Name
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [SD]
(Album only)
Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [SD]
(Album and picture list only)
Delete§
Delete Album§
Delete Pictures§
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [SD]
§
Change the date of a folder and move the picture in it into the folder of the changed date.
1 Press [2, 1] to select the item and press [3, 4] to change.
2 Press [OK].
≥You can also change the date of a picture.
≥Date folder of the original is maintained even if all original pictures were deleted after changing
the date of folder. Delete it if unrequired.
≥If there is no folder with the changed date, a new folder will be created.
You can give names to albums.
(> 80, Entering text)
≥Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album may be deleted by
another unit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
≥[BD-RE] [RAM] [SD] If there is a file other than DCF format or other folder exists in the date or album,
only the pictures will be deleted, and the date or the album itself will not be deleted.
Multiple editing is possible.
[Copy to Album, Copy to New Album, Change Date : Only when the picture list is displayed]
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Copy to Album”, “Copy to New Album”, “Change Date”, “Copy to Disc” or “Copy to HDD”.
Still pictures
Change Date§
RQT9434
67
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
68 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Copying still pictures
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [USB] [SD]
≥Pictures copied from SD card and USB memory will be categorised
according to the shooting date. Pictures without shooting date will
be categorised using the creation date.
≥The pictures recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW
cannot be copied.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 116), copying will
stop partway through.
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥Timer recording will not start while copying still pictures.
Copying all the still pictures on the USB
memory—Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
[USB] > [HDD]
1
While stopped
Insert the USB memory.
The menu is automatically displayed.
USB
Copying new still pictures on the SD
card—Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
[SD] > [HDD]
This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if
still pictures are imported from the same SD card, then only new still
pictures will be imported.
1
While stopped
Insert the SD card.
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the
USB memory.
2
The menu is automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
( JPEG )” and press [OK].
SD Card
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy from
USB
Copy to
HDD
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
SD card is inserted.
Copy all pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
OK
RETURN
Copy
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in the
card.
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
( JPEG )” and press [OK].
RETURN
3
Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy from
Copy
Cancel
OK
RETURN
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
≥Protection of the card is
– Set: Copy will start
– Not set: Go to step 4
4
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &
Delete” or “Copy Only” and press
[OK].
If “Copy & Delete” is selected
Copied pictures in the SD card will be deleted after copying.
If “Copy Only” is selected
Pictures will not be deleted.
≥
will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the
Picture View for the added pictures.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN
] for 3 seconds.
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “SD Card” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and 30
SD cards. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older
information will be deleted.
RQT9434
68
will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the
Picture View for the added pictures.
HDD
Copy added pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
3
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
≥
SD CARD
Copy to
Cancel
OK
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN
] for 3 seconds.
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same
at the copy destination.
Copying using the copying list
[HDD] ,-. [BD-RE] [RAM] [SD]
[SD] ,-. [BD-RE] [RAM]
[USB] > [HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM]
1
While stopped
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
Source
SD CARD
Direction
1 Copy
SD CARD HDD
Destination
2
Copy Mode
3
Create List
HDD
PICTURE High Speed
0
Start Copying
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
≥If you are not going to change each setting (> step 6).
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Set the copy direction.
午後４時２１分
6
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction
(> step 4).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
4
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode
(> step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
5
≥[Only when copied with “By Picture ( Album )” from [HDD] to
[BD-RE] [RAM] [SD] or from [BD-RE] [RAM] to [HDD] [SD]]
When specifying another album as the copying
destination, select “Album”.
Album
7
Set the copy mode.
Register still pictures for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 6).
≥Pictures from different dates or albums will not be registered
to same list.
Copy
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
Ti
New album
di
i
t
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 7
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying after step 7
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
[Note]
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy
list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still
pictures.
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
By Picture ( Date )
New Item
Direction
1 Copy
HDD BD / DVD
2
Copy Mode
3
Create List
No.
Size
∫ To edit the copying list
Title
New item (Total=0)
Select the item after step 5–3 (> left)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[OK].
PICTURE High Speed
0
Page 01/01
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Delete All
Add
Delete
Create copy list.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
New Item
No
By Picture ( Date )
Size
Title
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Item” and press [OK].
e.g., [HDD]
e.g., [SD]
By Picture ( Date )
Picture
By Picture ( Album )
Album
By Date Folder
By Album
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
Register with “By Picture ( Date )”/“By Picture ( Album )”/
“Picture”
1 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press the
“Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
≥Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item
at a time.
≥To select another “Album” or “Date” (> right)
3 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> right)
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Register with “By Date Folder”/“By Album”/“Album”
1 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the folder and press the
“Red” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
≥Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item
at a time.
3 Press [OK].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press the “Red”
button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.
2 Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (> 68, Copying using the copying list)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
∫ To select another “Album” or “Date”
Still pictures
3
69 ページ
After performing step 5–2 [> left, Register with “By Picture ( Date )”/
“By Picture ( Album )”/“Picture”]
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Album” or “Select Date” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Album” or “Date” and press
[OK].
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
≥To edit the copying list (> right)
4 Press [2] to confirm.
RQT9434
69
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
70 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Playing music
Music
Music
Playing MP3 files
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
≥You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording.
1
[Note]
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when the
“Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (> 92)]. To return to
the previous screen, press [RETURN ].
Playing music CD
While stopped
While stopped
Insert a disc or USB memory.
Insert a music CD.
e.g., [CD]
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (> 75) and
searches for the title information.
[USB]
CD
USB
POWERED BY
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Slect file type.
USB device is inserted.
OK
OK
RETURN
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each media.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Playback will automatically start if only MP3 is
recorded.
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Play / Copy
Music ( MP3 )” and press [OK].
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press
[OK].
≥Playback will automatically start.
≥Playback will automatically start.
e.g., [CD]
Music View
CD ( MP3 )
Playing track
Track List
Music View
CD
0.09
March Moon
No.
Folder: Mexican pops
Track Name
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
Playing track
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
OK
RETURN
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Slideshow
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Press [3, 4] to select “Blu-ray Disc / DVD” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
Using the tree screen to find a folder
1 While the Track List is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press
[OK].
Selected folder No. /Total folder
If the folder has no track, “– –” is displayed as folder number.
0.09
March Moon
MP3 music
OK
RETURN
F 7/27
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
001 Pi
l
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a folder and press
[OK].
The Track List for the folder appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
RQT9434
70
4.30
No.
Track Name
01
02
03
04
05
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
OPTION
Slideshow
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Retry access
Copy All
to HDD
Playing different track
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press [OK].
Reacquire the CD title
Press the “Yellow” button.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Playback of track will stop.
Select Folder
0.09
March Moon
Copy All
to HDD
Playing different track
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press [OK].
Music View
CD ( MP3 )
Track List
Do this flower open?
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Playback of track will stop.
[Note]
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when the
“Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (> 92).]. To return
to the previous screen, press [RETURN ].
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
71 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Playing music recorded on HDD
Copying music to HDD (> 75)
1
2
午後４時２１分
4
Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
Music View
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
and press [OK].
Music View
0.09
4.30
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Playing track
Menu
HDD
Track List
HDD
OK
Total Tracks 53
RETURN
No.
Track Name
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
OPTION
Slideshow
Add to My
Favourites
Artists
Playing different track
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press [OK].
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
Frequently Played
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Random Play
OK
OPTION
Please select to access music.
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [OK].
Artists
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
Frequently Played
Random Play
[Note]
≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while copying.
≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when the
“Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (> 92)]. To return
to the previous screen, press [RETURN ].
1
2
3
4
5
Categorise by artist
Categorise by album
Tracks registered in “My Favourites”
Tracks registered in “Playlists”
Tracks played most within 200 tracks played recently (up
to 30 Tracks)
6 Random playback of all tracks
∫ When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the artist.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the name of the artist and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [OK].
∫ When “Albums” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the album.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [OK].
Music
3
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Playback of track will stop.
RQT9434
71
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
72 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Playing music
Useful functions during music play
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Operations during play
Stop
Pause
Press [∫].
Search
Press [6] or [5].
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Skip
During play or while paused,
press [:] or [9].
Skip to the track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
Register a track to
the “My Favourites”
While Track List screen is displayed
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press the “Green” button.
≥Up to 99 tracks can be registered.
[HDD]
Properties
[HDD]
Repeat Play
Random
Press [;].
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
While Track List screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4] to select the track.
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press [OK].
≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
1
2
3
4
Press [DISPLAY].
Press [3, 4] to select “Play” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play” or “Random” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the item.
≥Repeat Play
“All”: Repeatedly playback the selected album, etc.
“Track”: Repeatedly playback the selected track
“Off”
≥Random
“On”: Randomly playback the selected album, etc.
“Off”
Re-master 1
Re-master 2
This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher frequency signals not recorded on the track.
1 Press [DISPLAY].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sound” and press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Sound Effects” and press [1].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Re-master 1” or “Re-master 2”.
≥This function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when
“Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD”, “DTS/DTS-HD” or “MPEG” is set to “PCM” (> 91). (However, in this case,
audio is output as 2ch from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.)
Display Still
Pictures
(Slideshow)
Sample pictures in this unit or pictures stored on the “Album” of the HDD can be played back as slideshow during
playback of the music.
While playing the music
Press the “Red” button.
Change the pictures to display
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Picture Album” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [OK].
Select Picture Album
Please select the album to start slidshow.
Sample Pictures
My Favourites
My Travel
While playing music a picture slideshow
can be displayed.
OK
RETURN
To end the slide show
Press [RETURN ].
≥It will also end when the music is stopped.
Playing music
continuously even
after turning off
power to the
television
When the unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA) that supports HDAVI Control 2 or later, the unit is turned
off if the power to the television is turned off, since “Power off link” (> 76) operates.
The following operations make it possible to keep the power of the unit ON and to play music continuously.
1 While playing music
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “TV Power Off” and press [OK].
≥Sound may be discontinued for several seconds when the power to the television is turned off.
≥If the operation mentioned above is executed while audio is output from the television, the sound may not be
output from the amplifier/receiver. It is recommended to set the amplifier/receiver beforehand so that audio will
be output from the amplifier/receiver.
RQT9434
72
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
73 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Editing music/playlist
Album and track operation
Editing music
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
[HDD]
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
and press [OK].
Delete All Tracks
≥While displaying “Menu”
screen
≥When doing “Delete All Tracks”, “Clear My Favourites” or
“Clear Frequently Played” (> go to step 4)
Music View
Menu
HDD
Delete All Tracks
All tracks in the selected Artist or
Album are deleted in case of “Delete
All Tracks” or “Delete Album”.
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
Delete Album
press [OK].
≥While displaying “Albums” ≥Once deleted, the recorded
screen
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
Delete
proceeding.
Total Tracks 53
≥While displaying “Artists”
screen
Artists
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
Frequently Played
Random Play
OPTION
OK
Please select to access music.
RETURN
3
Press [3, 4] to select item and press
[OK].
∫ When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the artist.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the name of the artist, and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To edit the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
∫ When “Albums” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the album.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To edit the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
4
5
Delete all tracks in the HDD.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Press [OPTION].
Edit Album Name
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
Clear My
Favourites
≥While displaying “Menu”
screen
Clear Frequently
Played
≥While displaying “Menu”
screen
(> 80, Entering text)
Remove all tracks in “My Favourites”.
Tracks themselves are not deleted
from the HDD.
Press [2, 1] to select “Clear” and
press [OK].
Remove all tracks in “Frequently
Played”. Tracks themselves are not
deleted from the HDD.
Press [2, 1] to select “Clear” and
press [OK].
Remove
Selected track is removed. Track itself
is not deleted from the HDD.
≥While displaying “My
Favourites” or “Frequently Press [2, 1] to select “Remove”
and press [OK].
Played” screen
Press [3, 4] to select item and press
[OK].
e.g., while selecting album
Delete Album
(> 74)
Add to Playlist
Edit Album Name
Album and track operation
(> right)
e.g., while selecting artist
Delete All Tracks
Edit Artist Name
Album and track operation (> right)
Music
e.g., while selecting track
Delete
(> 74)
Add to Playlist
Edit Track Name
Album and track operation (> right)
Edit Artist Name
(> 72)
Properties
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9434
73
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
74 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Editing music/playlist
Register track to Playlist
Editing Playlist
[HDD]
[HDD]
You can register your favourite albums and tracks into 10 preset
playlists.
≥Name of the playlist can be changed.
≥New playlist cannot be added.
≥Up to 999 tracks can be registered to each playlist.
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
and press [OK].
Music View
4
Edit the playlist
Press [3, 4] to select the playlist and
press [OPTION].
Menu
HDD
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
and press [OK].
Total Tracks 53
Artists
e.g., while selecting playlist
Albums
My Favourites
Remove All Tracks
Playlists
Frequently Played
Edit Playlist Name
Random Play
OPTION
OK
(> below)
Please select to access music.
RETURN
3
Edit the track in the playlist
Press [3, 4] to select item and press
[OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select the playlist and
press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
[OPTION].
∫ When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the artist.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the name of the artist, and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To register the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
e.g., while selecting the track in playlist
4
5
Press [OPTION].
6
Press [3, 4] and select the playlist to
register, and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Add to
Playlist” and press [OK].
Music View
Playlists
(> below)
Add to Playlist
(> left)
Edit Track Name
∫ When “Albums” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the album.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To register the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
Remove
Edit Artist Name
Properties
5
(> 73)
(> 72)
Press [3, 4] to select item and press
[OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Playlist operation
HDD
Playlist Name
My Favourites
Playlist 01
Playlist 02
Playlist 03
Playlist 04
Playlist 05
Playlist 06
Playlist 07
Playlist 08
Playlist 09
OK
After performing steps 1–4 (> above, Editing Playlist)
Remove All
Tracks
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove”
and press [OK].
Please select playlist to add to.
RETURN
Remove
RQT9434
74
Selected track is removed. Track itself
is not deleted from the HDD.
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove”
and press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Remove all tracks in the selected
playlist. Tracks themselves are not
deleted from the HDD.
Edit Playlist
Name
(> 80, Entering text)
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
75 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Copying music to HDD
You can store the two formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.
Music CD (CD-DA)
When inserting music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal
Gracenote® Database to obtain title information. The album name,
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you
find the track easily when playing back.
1
While stopped
Insert a disc or USB memory.
[CD] (Music CD)
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and
searches for the title information.
MP3
You can copy MP3 files from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD or USB
memory.
The track name and artist name will be displayed on this unit if the
information is contained in ID3 tag of the MP3 file.
POWERED BY
About the Gracenote® Database
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and retrieve
music CD title information.
When a music CD is inserted, the unit will automatically search for
and obtain information about the inserted music CD.
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles
and artist information can be obtained.This unit has an internal
database containing information for approximately 350,000 album
titles.
If the title of the newly released music CD is not in the built-in
database, it is possible to acquire the title automatically by
connecting to the network via the Internet. (> 103)
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] (MP3) [USB]
The menu is automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )” and press
[OK].
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] (MP3) It will go to step 2 automatically if it is
only MP3 that is recorded.
e.g., [CD] (MP3) [USB]
If there are music CDs with very similar title information, then the
incorrect title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are
found, it is displayed as “Unknown Artist”, “Unknown Album”.
In these cases, enter the music CD title information manually, after
recording to the HDD has completed.
CD
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Slect file type.
OK
RETURN
Copying music from a disc or a USB
memory
USB
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]> [HDD]
≥[CD] (Music CD): All tracks in the CD will be recorded.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3) : All tracks in the folder will be recorded.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2
Press the “Blue” button.
e.g., [CD] (Music CD)
Music View
CD
Track List
0.09
4.30
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Playing track
OK
RETURN
3
No.
Track Name
01
02
03
04
05
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
OPTION
Slideshow
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Retry access
Copy All
to HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To return to the previous screen in steps 1 to 3
Press [RETURN ].
Music
≥It will be recorded as 1 album to the HDD in 1 recording.
≥Audio quality
[CD] (Music CD): LPCM,
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3): MP3
≥The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 40000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that
can be recorded will be reduced.
To stop recording after step 3
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
If the menu screen (> above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Press [3, 4] to select “Blu-ray Disc / DVD” and press [OK].
[USB]
Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer
recordings will not proceed.
≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc, USB
memory or SD card.
≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
RQT9434
75
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
Others
Convenient
functions
76 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using
“HDAVI Control” or Q Link.
(When the TV is on)
Easy playback [VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that
offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV
(VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this
function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable.
See the operating instructions for connected equipment for
operational details.
≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we
have developed and added. As such, its operation with other
manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be
guaranteed.
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the
TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode
([VIERA]Link]) or AV input mode ([Q]Link]) and the TV displays the
corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2,
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
(When the TV is off)
Power on link [VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the
TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2,
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
≥[BD-V] [DVD-V] [CD]
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
Power off link [VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
Preparation
1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable (> 17), or to your receiver using an
HDMI cable (> 102).
2 Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 93). (The default setting is “On”.)
3 Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected
equipment (e.g., TV).
≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be
used as “HDAVI Control”.
4 Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select
this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI
Control” function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat
this procedure.
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also
automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to
standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is
displayed during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to
standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, finalising
etc.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible
Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn
off.
What is Q Link?
Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this
unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting
the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
Preparation
≥Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
(> 17).
For your reference
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar
function to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or
consult your dealer.
≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
76
What you can do with “HDAVI Control” and Q Link
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
“HDAVI Control 4” is the newest standard (current as of
December, 2008) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible
equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s
conventional HDAVI equipment.
≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’
equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
RQT9434
午後４時２１分
Direct TV Recording [VIERA]Link]§3 [Q]Link]
This function allows you to immediately start recording the
programme that you are viewing on the TV.
Recording starts.
≥The titles are recorded to the HDD.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥This function does not work during EXT LINK standby or
recording.
Playing music continuously even after turning off
power to the television§4
(> 72, Playing music continuously even after turning off power to
the television)
§1
This button is available only when this unit is on.
When this button is pressed, the playback image is not
immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible
to watch the contents from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback
started.
§3
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 3” or later.
§4
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 2” or later.
[Note]
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the
equipment condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the
connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
§2
77 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Easy control only with VIERA remote
control
If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” or later
function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient
functions.
You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate
this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
≥The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press
incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
午後４時２１分
Using the OPTION menu window to operate this
unit [VIERA]Link]§1
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the
“Control Panel” (> below) and display the Top Menu for DVDVideo.
1 Press [OPTION].
e,g.,
[Note]
OPTION menu may be disabled when
operating the BD-Video or DVD-Video.
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Aspect
Play Menu
Top Menu
Menu
Drive Select
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Using the FUNCTION MENU window to operate
this unit [VIERA]Link]§1
OK
RETURN
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
Control Panel
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window
using the TV remote control.
Control Panel is displayed
(> below).
Switch to TV
Displayed when watching digital
satellite broadcasts with the tuner of
this unit. It will return to the TV
picture.
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU window is
displayed (> left).
Aspect
Switch the screen mode (> 83).
Multi Audio
Switch the signal (> 28).
≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV
remote control, and press [OK].
≥About the FUNCTION MENU window (> 13).
Pause Live TV programme
[VIERA]Link]§2
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume
later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you
have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
1 When you want to pause the TV programme
Sub Channel
Subtitle Language
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the
TV remote control.
2
≥This unit turns on automatically.
When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel (> right) and press
[OK].
≥The TV programme resumes.
To stop Pause Live TV
1 Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥Subtitles are not displayed correctly if the setting for Subtitle
Character Set is different between this unit and the TV.
≥This function does not work with TV’s analogue broadcast
programmes during EXT LINK standby or recording.
Refer to other “Note” on page 79, “To pause the TV programme you
are watching—Pause Live TV”.
Play Menu
Play Menu is displayed (> 82).
Top Menu [BD-V] [DVD-V]
Top Menu is displayed (> 21).
Menu [DVD-V]
Menu is displayed.
Pop-up Menu [BD-V]
Pop-up Menu is displayed.
Drive Select
Select the HDD, BD or SD drive
Rotate RIGHT (JPEG)
Rotate the still picture (> 65).
Rotate LEFT (JPEG)
Zoom in (JPEG)
Zoom out (JPEG)
TV Power Off
Enlarge or shrink the still picture
(> 65).
Play music continuously even after
turning off power to the television
(> 72).
∫ Using the Control Panel
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search
forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to
operate this unit [VIERA]Link]§1” (> above).
The Control Panel is displayed (> below).
≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
– [3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search
forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.
≥While playing still pictures
– [4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture,
[EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.
Control Panel
Exit
§1
§2
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 2” or later.
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 3” or later.
Convenient
functions
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only
this unit to standby mode
Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 93).
RQT9434
77
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
78 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM
You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home
screen with VIERA CAST, for example YouTube, Picasa Web
Albums. (Current as of December 2009)
Preparation
≥Network connection (> 103)
≥Network Settings (> 94)
1
Press [VIERA CAST].
Message is displayed. Please read these instructions
carefully and then press [OK].
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
and press [OK].
≥You can operate VIERA CAST using the following buttons
on the unit’s remote control. [3, 4, 2, 1], [OK],
[RETURN ], coloured buttons and numbered buttons.
VIERA CAST Home screen;
Setup
London, United Kingdom
28°
Weather
E 17
COMING SOON
km/h
TM
Web Albums
Panasonic Select
Featured Videos
COMING
SOON
COMING
SOON
Bloomberg
TELEVISION
XXX
XXX
XXX
7465.95
778.94
1442.82
15min. delay
-89.68
-9.47998
-25.15
Images are for illustration purpose, contents may
change without notice.
For details of VIERA CAST Home screen
Refer to a help item on the home screen.
To return to VIERA CAST Home screen
Press [VIERA CAST].
To exit from VIERA CAST
Press [EXIT].
≥Set the “Lock” to “On” to restrict using VIERA CAST. (> 94)
≥Set the “Automatic Volume Control” to “Off” when the audio is
warped while using the VIERA CAST. (> 94)
RQT9434
78
[Note]
≥If using slow Internet connection, the video may not be displayed
correctly. A high-speed Internet service with a speed of at least 6
Mbps is recommended.
≥Be sure to update the software (firmware) when a software
(firmware) update notice is displayed on the screen.
If the software (firmware) is not updated, you will not be able to use
the VIERA CASTTM function.
≥VIERA CASTTM Home screen is subject to change without notice.
≥The services through VIERA CASTTM are operated by their
respective service providers, and service may be discontinued
either temporarily or permanently without notice. Therefore,
Panasonic will make no warranty for the content or the continuity of
the services.
≥All features of websites or content of the service may not be
available.
≥Some content may be inappropriate for some viewers.
≥Some content may only be available for specific countries and may
be presented in specific languages.
≥If timer recording starts, VIERA CAST will stop.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
79 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Pause Live TV
To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
1
When you want to pause the TV programme while
watching TV
Press [;].
HDD
PAUSE
Pause Live TV
2
When you want to resume
Press [1] (PLAY).
≥The programme is saved on the HDD in DR recording mode.
≥Programmes can be saved temporarily up to 8 hours on the
HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)
Operation during Pause Live TV
Search
Press [6, 5].
Pause
Press [;].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.
Quick View Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
≥Press again to return to the normal speed.
Slow-motion While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Stop Pause 1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
Live TV
press [OK].
[Note]
≥Temporary save is stopped in following cases.
– When save time exceeds 8 hours
– When save time exceeds 1 hour with no HDD free space
– When 2 programmes are recorded simultaneously
– When start time of a timer recording arrives§
≥The Pause Live TV function does not work
– The clock is not set.
– While 2 programmes simultaneous recording
– While watching a programme being recorded
– When DV is selected
– When a radio programme is selected
– During recording§
≥Titles that are copyright protected (Copying is prohibited) cannot
be viewed going back in time more than the allowed playback
period.
≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while
the screen is being displayed the screen saver is displayed [only
when the “Screen Saver” in Setup menu is set to “On” (> 92)]. To
return to the previous screen, press [RETURN ].
§
Only when “One cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 87).
DLNA feature
∫ Network connection (> 103)
∫ Register the DLNA compatible equipment to
this unit (> 97, Register the DLNA compatible
equipment to this unit)
∫ Network Settings (> 94)
[Note]
≥You cannot playback the titles on other DLNA compatible
equipment from this unit.
≥Still pictures, music, and copyright protected (Copying is
prohibited) titles cannot be played back.
≥Editing is not possible. (Only delete can be performed from
Panasonic equipment)
≥Programme being recorded cannot be played back.
≥Playback via DLNA compatible equipment cannot be done when
this unit is in the following conditions:
– While simultaneously recording 2 programmes
– While playing back a disc
– While simultaneously performing High speed copy and recording
– While displaying the Setup menu
– While executing functions using a network, such as "VIERA
CAST"
≥There may be some video that cannot be played back on DLNA
compatible equipment depending on the equipment.
≥You cannot playback simultaneously from 2 or more items of DLNA
compatible equipment.
Playing back from Panasonic DLNA
compatible equipment
1
Operate the playback equipment to
display the list of titles on this unit.
≥For operation of the equipment, refer to their respective
operating instructions.
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
to playback (folder), and press [OK]
≥ Menu structure will be different depending on the equipment
connected to this unit. Select the contents by repeating the operation.
≥ Control Panel is displayed once the playback starts.
Operation can be performed with [3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], and
[EXIT].
Control Panel
e.g.
Exit
≥ Press [OK] if the Control Panel is not displayed.
≥Even with Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment, listing of titles
or playback method may be different.
In such cases, operate following the operating instructions of that
equipment, or following the instructions on the screen.
Convenient
functions
You can enjoy the video saved on the HDD of this unit on DLNA
compatible equipment connected via a network.
For details regarding connection and operation of equipment
connected via a network, refer to their respective operating
instructions.
Playing back from non-Panasonic DLNA
compatible equipment
Select the title on this unit from the connected
equipment, and start the playback.
≥For operation of the equipment, refer to their respective operating
instructions.
RQT9434
79
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
80 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Entering text
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
character and press [OK].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
Characters
Title ([HDD] [RAM])
≥To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name
field and press [;]. (The selected characters are
deleted.)
64 (44§)
Title ([BD-RE] [BD-R])
254
Album of still pictures ([HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM])
36
Album (Music) ([HDD])
59
Track ([HDD])
59
Artist ([HDD])
39
Playlist (Music) ([HDD])
59
Disc ([BD-RE] [BD-R])
254
Disc ([RAM])
64
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
e.g., entering the letter “R”
3
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
44
Disc
40
[SD]
Characters
Album of still pictures
36
[Note]
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
Title (timer recording)
Select “Input Name” in step 3 on page 35.
Title
Select “Enter Title Name” in step 4 on page 48.
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 1 of “Providing a name for a disc”
on page 84.
Album of still pictures ([HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [SD])
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4, “Editing still pictures
(JPEG)” on page 66.
Album (Music) ([HDD])
Select “Edit Album Name” in step 5 of “Editing music” on
page 73.
Track ([HDD])
Select “Edit Track Name” in step 5 of “Editing music” on page
73.
Artist ([HDD])
Select “Edit Artist Name” in step 5 of “Editing music” on page
73.
Playlist (Music) ([HDD])
Select “Edit Playlist Name” in step 5 of “Editing Playlist” on
page 74.
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Top Menu Preview
2 A
Delete
Set
OK
RETURN
0 9
2
3
4
Other Characters
5
6
7
a
8
9
0
B
C
b
c
3 D
E
F
d
e
f
/
%
4 G
H
I
g
h
i
$
j
k
n
l
@
m
o
[
]
_
p
q
r
s
(
t
u
v
{
}
)
-
w
x
"
'
y
:
z
;
\
`
|
^
5 J
K
L
6 M N
O
7 P
Q
R
8 T
U
V
9 W X
0 . ,
Y
Z
?
!
S
Space
*
&
Press the “Red” button or
“Green” button to select
character type and press
[OK].
“Standard Characters”:
(> left, Alphabet characters,
etc.)
“Other Characters”:
(> below, Umlaut characters,
accented characters, etc.)
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
¨
©
ª
«
¬
-
®
¯
°
±
²
³
´
3 µ
¶
·
¸
¹
º
»
¼ ½ ¾
4 ¿
À
5 É
1
2
80
§
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Ê
Ë
Ï
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Õ
Ì Í
Ö ×
Î
6 Ó Ô
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
7 Ý
ß
â
ã
ä
å
æ
Þ
Å Æ Ç
È
à
á
8 ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
ð
9 ñ
0 û
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
Space
RQT9434
7 P
8 T
Q
R
U
V
S
To end partway
Press [RETURN ].
Text is not added.
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation or creating Top Menu (> 86). When entering a title
name, the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed
in “Top Menu Preview” window.
Enter Title Name
_
Chapter
1_
Show Enter Title Name screen.
Standard Characters
L
Characters
Title
1 1
7
“Writing...” appears then the
screen returns to the Title view screen and so on.
Title name for timer recording
Enter Title Name
_
K
6 M7 N 7 O
Press [∫] (Set).
§
1
5 J
1 Press [7] to move to the
7th row.
2 Press [7] twice to highlight
“R”.
3 Press [OK].
Standard Characters
Other Characters
Top Menu Preview
1 1
2
3
5
6
7
8
Chapter 1
2 A
B
C
a
b
c
3 D
E
F
d
e
f
/
4 G
H
I
g
h
i
$
4
9
0
*
%
&
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
81 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Convenient functions to playback and viewing or listening
Subtitles§
Using on-screen menus
[BD-V] [DVD-V] [AVCHD]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> below,
Language).
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [Except titles recorded in DR mode, or
copied from high definition video (AVCHD format)]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle number is displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
≥You can select “Text” in the subtitle number while playing back
a DivX video file containing DivX subtitle text. DivX subtitles
text is displayed as a closed caption by selecting “Text”.
Common procedures
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Play
Picture
Sound
Other
Soundtrack
Digital 2/0 ch
1
Subtitles
Off
Audio Channel
LR
Menu
Item
Setting
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
≥The menu is not displayed when playing still pictures.
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
Multi Audio [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [Titles recorded in DR mode, or
copied from high definition video (AVCHD format)]
Switch in the case of multiple audio.
Subtitle Language [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [Titles recorded in DR
mode, or copied from high definition video (AVCHD format)]
Select the subtitle language in the case of multiple languages.
Subtitle Style [BD-V]
Select the subtitle style recorded on the disc.
Angle§ [BD-V] [DVD-V] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio Channel [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] (Titles in recording mode other
than DR) [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] and DivX
(> 40, Changing audio during play)
§
Video [AVCHD]
The video recording method appears
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using
the menus (> 21) on the disc.
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
Signal Type
[BD-V]
≥Primary Video
Audio attribute
Video:
The video recording method appears.
Soundtrack:
Select the type of audio or language.
≥Secondary Video
Video:
Select on/off of images.
The video recording method appears.
Soundtrack:
Select on/off of audio and the
language.
Soundtrack§
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [Except titles recorded in DR mode, or
copied from high definition video (AVCHD format)]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear (> right, Audio attribute).
[DVD-V] [AVCHD]
Select the audio and language (> right, Audio attribute,
Language).
DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
audio type.
LPCM/ Digital/ Digital+/
TrueHD/DTS/DTS-HD/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Language
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
DAN:
POR:
RUS:
JPN:
CHI:
KOR:
MAL:
VIE:
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
Danish
Portuguese
Russian
Japanese
Chinese
Korean
Malay
Vietnamese
THA:
POL:
CES:
SLK:
HUN:
FIN:
¢:
Thai
Polish
Czech
Slovak
Hungarian
Finnish
Others
Convenient
functions
1
RQT9434
81
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
82 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Convenient functions to playback and viewing or listening
Play menu—Change the play sequence
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
Repeat Play
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [CD] [USB] [AVCHD]
Items displayed depends on the contents of the playback.
≥All
≥Title
≥Chapter
≥Playlist
≥Track
Select “Off” to cancel.
Random (Only when playing music)
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
While playing, press [3, 4] to select “On”.
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Mode
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [AVCHD]
Select the picture quality mode during play.
≥Normal:
Default setting
≥Soft:
Soft picture with fewer video artifacts
≥Fine:
Details are sharper
≥Cinema:
Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark
scenes. (This does not affect the titles in DR
mode.)
HD optimizer
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [AVCHD] and DivX
It will compensate the mosaic noise in the video and haze
around the characters precisely.
Progressive§
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (> 118, Film and video).
§
RQT9434
82
≥Auto:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
≥Video:
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
≥Film:
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration
to the right, then select “Auto”.
It will work when “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup menu is “Off”
(> 93) and “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu is “576p/
480p” (> 94) and playing [DVD-V].
Sound menu—Change the sound effect
Sound Effects
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [CD] [USB] [AVCHD]
≥Re-master 1
≥Re-master 2
(Discs record at 48 kHz or less)
This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher
frequency signals not recorded on the track.
≥This function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or
the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when “Dolby D/Dolby
D +/Dolby TrueHD”, “DTS/DTS-HD” or “MPEG” is set to
“PCM” (> 91). (However, in this case, audio is output as 2ch
from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.)
Dialogue Enhancer
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [AVCHD] and DivX
(3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
Other menu—Change the display position
Position
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [CD] [USB] [SD] [AVCHD] and DivX
Change where this menu screen appears on your TV.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
83 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Status messages
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen
Status of this unit during recording or playback can be displayed with
the following operation.
The status message will differ depending on the media or status of
this unit.
Press [STATUS
午後４時２１分
].
The display changes each time you press the button.
When black bars are shown at the top, bottom, left, and right sides of
the screen, you can enlarge the image to fill the screen.
1
2
3
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Aspect” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select the item.
≥Normal:
Normal output
≥Side cut:
The black bars on the right and left sides of the 16:9 image
disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the
right and left sides of the image are cut off when the black
bar is not displayed.
A Status of this unit is displayed.
e.g.,
HD D
REC1
1
ZDF
1
2
3
4
5
16:9 image with
black bars on the
right and left
3 KiKa REC2
Selected drive status/type of disc or USB memory
Recording status/the remaining time/play status
Channel
The name of the station
Recording in background/copy progress indicator (When
recording 2 programmes simultaneously.)
Displayed with black
bars on right and left
on the 16:9 aspect
ratio TV screen
B Detailed status of this unit is displayed.
e.g.,
Display as frame
on the 4:3 aspect
ratio TV screen§
18:53:50 11.11.2009
Remain HDD 45:53 DR
T1 0:05.14 XP
1 T2
2 T3
§
0:10.10 DR
0:00.10 DR
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Side
cut
Only when “TV Aspect” (> 92) is set to “Letterbox”.
≥Zoom:
The black bars on the top and bottom sides of the 4:3 image
disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the
top and bottom sides of the image are cut off when the black
bar is not displayed.
0:35.32
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Side
cut
≥When using Pause Live TV
18:53:50 11.11.2009
Live 18:53.50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4:3 image with
black bars at the
top and bottom
Play 18:40.12
Date and time
Available recording time and recording mode
Title number and elapsed time during play and recording mode
Title number and elapsed time during recording and recording
mode
Current play position
Total time
Current time
The time when the picture currently displayed on the television
was broadcasted
C Status of the broadcast being received is displayed. (> 27)
1 ZDF
Bruder
0:50 - 2:30
Now
12:55 All DVB Channels
Change category
For info press
MULTI
/
4
Displayed as frame
on the 16:9 aspect
ratio TV screen
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with
Zoom
Press [OK].
[Note]
≥The screen mode is switched to “Normal” in the following
situations:
– when you change channel
– when you start or end the playback of a title
– when the unit is turned off or on.
≥[BD-V] [DVD-V] “Side cut” does not have any effect.
≥When “TV Aspect” (> 92) is set to “Pan & Scan” or “Letterbox”, the
“Zoom” effect is disabled.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Convenient
functions
RQT9434
83
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
84 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Disc and card management
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[SD]
Common procedures
Setting the protection
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
1
While stopped
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Blu-ray Disc /
DVD” or “SD Card” and press [OK].
1
FUNCTION MENU
2
e.g., [RAM]
Blu-ray
Play all Video
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music
SD
Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
Protection” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
DVD Management Files
1
Time Remaining 5:38 EP
DVD-RAM
TV Guide
Copy
View
Others
DVD-RAM
Play Video
Playlists
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
DVD Management
Blu-ray Disc / DVD
SD Card
USB
Select for playback of disc and formatting of disc etc.
Titles 11
Used 0 : 22
Disc Name
Disc Protection
On
Delete all titles
OK
Format Disc
RETURN
OK
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Blu-ray Disc
Management”, “DVD Management” or
“Card Management” and press [OK].
e.g., [RAM]
DVD Management Files
DVD-RAM
1
Time Remaining 5:38 EP
Titles 11
Used 0 : 22
RETURN
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is writeprotected.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Off
Delete all titles
Format Disc
Providing a name for a disc
OK
RETURN
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparation
≥[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] Release protection (> above, Setting the
protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
1
Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [OK].
(> 80, Entering text)
≥The disc name is displayed in the Blu-ray Disc Management/DVD
Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment after creating top menu.
DVD Management Files
DVD-RAM
1
Time Remaining 5:38 EP
Titles 1
Used 0
My favourite
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9434
84
My favourite
01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
04
85 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Deleting all titles—Delete all titles
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Release protection (> 84, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (> 84, Common procedures)
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
titles” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finished.
4
Press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
午後４時２１分
Enabling the unit’s recording function—
Format
[BD-RE] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[BD-R] [+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
[SD]
Preparation
≥[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [SD] Release protection (> 11, 84, Setting the
protection).
[Note]
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data), and
they cannot be restored. Check carefully before proceeding.
The contents are deleted when you format a disc or card even if
you have set protection.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 84, Common procedures)
1
2
3
[Note]
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Still picture data (JPEG) or computer data cannot be deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
Delete BD-Video data
[SD]
You can delete the BD-Live video data (> 46).
Preparation
After performing steps 1–3 (> 84, Common procedures)
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete BDVideo data” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finished.
4
Press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select, “Format Disc”
or “Format Card” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when formatting is finished.
[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
4
Press [OK].
[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.
≥[-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video
format on this unit.
≥[HDD] Perform “Format HDD” in the Setup menu (> 90).
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN ].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Convenient
functions
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
RQT9434
85
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
86 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Disc and card management
Selecting the background style—Top
Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
The background selected here will be displayed as the DVD-Video
top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu ([+RW]).
After performing steps 1–3 (> 84, Common procedures)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [OK].
[Note]
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately
four times longer).
After finalising
≥[BD-R] [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(> 85) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] If you finalise discs recorded on
Panasonic equipment other than this unit, the background selected
as “Top Menu” may not be displayed.
≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
Top Menu List
1
2
3
Display after finalising
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Title Name
4
5
6
01
7
8
9
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (> 49,
Change Thumbnail)
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu
first—Auto-Play Select
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising or
creating Top Menu ([+RW]).
After performing steps 1–3 (> 84, Common procedures)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
“Title 1” and press [OK].
Top Menu:
The top menu appears first.
Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying
the top menu.
Finalising—Finalise
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by finalising it
on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video that complies with
DVD-Video standards. Before finalising, select the background on
the “Top Menu” (> above). The menu you create with the unit can
also be used on most DVD players.
[BD-R]
≥Finalising BD-R prevents accidental recording or editing.
≥BD-R that were recorded on this unit may not be played on other
Blu-ray Disc players, etc. whether or not you finalise it.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 84, Common procedures)
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finalising is finished.
[Note]
≥You cannot cancel finalising.
≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
4
RQT9434
86
Press [OK].
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> left)
before creating top menu.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 84, Common procedures)
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Menu” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
4
Press [OK].
[Note]
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
87 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Changing the unit’s settings
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Common procedures
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
Setup
DVB Tuning
HDD / Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Network Settings
Others
OK
RETURN
4
5
6
Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
option and press [OK].
≥Follow the instruction on the screen if the operation method
is different.
To delete channels on a Favourite
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column and
press [OK].
≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.
≥Press the “Yellow” button to delete all the channels from the
Favourite.
3 Press [RETURN ].
4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel
itself. You can still select the channel from the “All DVB
Channels”.
To change the name of a Favourite in the
“Favourite” column
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press the “Red” button.
≥User input screen appear.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a character and press [OK].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
≥To delete a character
Press the “Red” button.
≥To delete all characters
Press the “Blue” button.
4 Press [RETURN ] to save the Favourite.
§
When the station name of the “All DVB Channels” column is
highlighted
∫ Channel List
You can edit the Channel List to change the channel skip setting or
channel number assignments to make tuning simpler.
All DVB Channels
1 ZDF
2 3sat
3 KiKa
4 ZDFinfokanal
5 ZDFdokukanal
6 ZDFtheaterkanal
7 DKULTUR
Sorting 123...
Select
Hide
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
DVB Tuning
∫ Favourites Edit
You can create four Favourites of channels for viewing and
recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the
channel setting itself.
≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourites
during timer recording standby.
Press the “Green” button to select the Favourite to edit.
Favourites Editor
Sorting 123...
All DVB Channels
ZDF
3sat
KiKa
ZDFinfokanal
ZDFdokukanal
ZDFtheaterkanal
DKULTUR
DLF
Favourites 1
Select favourites
Reveal all
123/ABC
To skip unwanted channels
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels”.
≥Press the “Red” button to select the “Category”.
≥Press the “Blue” button to change the sorting mode.
2 Press [OK].
≥The check mark is removed.
≥To clear the skip setting, press [OK] again.
≥To clear the all skip setting, press “Yellow” button.
To change the channel number assignment
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels” and
press the “Green” button.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel number you wish to reassign.
3 Press [OK].
≥If another channel is already assigned to the channel number
you wish to use, the two channels will be switched.
∫ Auto Setup
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (> 18) fails for some
reason.
Select channel
Add
RETURN
Select category
Move
Add all
123/ABC
To add channels to a Favourite
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels”
column and press [OK].
≥Repeat this step to add other channels.
≥Press the “Red” button to select the Category.
≥Press the “Blue” button to change the sorting mode.
≥Press the “Yellow” button to add all the available channels to
the Favourite. (This function is available only when no channels
have been added to the Favourite.)
2 Press [RETURN ].
3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
Press [3, 4] to select the Auto Setup method.
≥Search by selected satellite
Satellite is selected and transponders are searched for channels.
≥Search all satellites
All satellites and transponders are searched for channels.
When the confirmation screen appears
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥When restarting the auto tuning using the main unit’s buttons
(> 114, To reset this unit)
Convenient
functions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RETURN
Category
To change the order of channels of a Favourite
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column to
move and press the “Green” button.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel and press
the “Green” button.
≥Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.
4 Press [RETURN ].
5 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
RQT9434
87
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
88 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Changing the unit’s settings
∫ Manual Tuning
You can add each new channels manually that the Auto Setup could
not complete successfully.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.
Transponder Frequency
Enter value with numbered buttons.
Symbol Rate
Press [2, 1] to select the auto and manual input of symbol
rate method.
≥Data flow transmission rate from the satellite to the dish.
Polarisation
Press [2, 1] to select the Polarisation method.
≥Polarisation indicates whether the transponder transmits the
satellite signal horizontally or vertically.
Modulation
Press [2, 1] to select the Modulation method.
Service ID
Press [2, 1] to select the Service ID method.
2 Press [OK] to start scan.
The set channel is displayed in the table.
3 Press [EXIT] and press [W X CH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
∫ Update Channel List
You can update the satellite digital channels to receive to the latest
one.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Update Channel List” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the method and press [2, 1] to select
settings.
∫ Antenna System
You can receive several satellites if you have DiSEqC control
antenna system.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Antenna System”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select antenna system and press [OK].
[One LNB]
≥Search Mode
All Channels:
Search for all channels.
Free Channels:
Search for free channels only.
[DiSEqC1.0]
Astra 19.2° E
Progress
0%
This will take about 10 minutes.
No.
Channel Name
Free TV:0
Pay TV:0
Searching
100%
Type
Quality
Radio:0
RETURN
“Finished” is displayed when the search is finished.
4 Press [RETURN
] to save the newly found channels.
∫ Signal Condition
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Check the satellite dish if you are receiving a poor signal.
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
2 Press [INPUT SELECT] to select “TV”.
3 Display the Setup menu again (> 87, Common procedures).
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Signal Condition
Signal Input
Channel Name
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
Satellite
Parameter
Change Input
RETURN
Up to 4 LNBs can be controlled.
≥This unit supports DiSEqC Version 1.0.
∫ LNB Configuration
LNB
≥If you set to “One LNB” in “Antenna System”.
Not selectable.
≥If you set to “MiniDiSEqC” in “Antenna System”.
[AA]
[AB]
≥If you set to “DiSEqC1.0” in “Antenna System”.
[AA]
[AB]
[BA]
[BB]
LNB Low Band Frequency (MHz)
Update Channel List
Satellite
Compatible with Single LNB
[MiniDiSEqC] Up to 2 LNBs can be controlled.
3 Press [OK].
The unit starts searching for newly available satellite digital
channels.
88
Signal Quality
≥Below 2 (display red):
The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the
pictures and sound.
≥2–5 (display orange):
The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in
the pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.
≥Over 5 (display green):
Optimum picture and sound quality.
Signal Strength
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength is
0%, “10” means signal strength is 100%.
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your satellite dish.
≥When the signal is weak:
– adjust the position and direction of the dish.
– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
Satellite
Satellite name is displayed.
Parameter
Physical channel and frequency is displayed.
≥Satellite
Satellite name is displayed.
≥Scan Mode
Quick:
In this mode, scanning takes place in a short period of time.
Full:
In this mode, the scanning is thorough but takes more time.
RQT9434
Signal Input
Press [2, 1] to select the terminal for which you wish to display the
signal condition.
LNB in 1
1 ZDF
0
0
10
10
Astra 19.2° E
11836MHz, H, 27497kS/s
Channel Up
Channel Down
CH
LNB High Band Frequency (MHz)
Satellite
Set the connected satellite for the selected LNB.
[No Satellite]
[Turksat 42°E]
[Hellas 39°E]
[Astra 28.2°E]
[Arabsat 26°E]
[Astra 23.5°E]
[Astra 19.2°E]
[Eutelsat 16°E]
[Hot Bird 13°E]
[Eutelsat 10°E]
[Eurobird 9°E]
[Eutelsat 7°E]
[Sirius 5°E]
[Intelsat 1°W]
[Amos 4°W]
[Atl. Bird 5°W]
[Atl. Bird 7°W]
[Atl. Bird 8°W]
[Hispasat 30°W]
[User defined]
≥If you do not know the connected satellite, select “No Satellite”.
(Available satellite will be searched in Auto Setup.)
≥If you select “User defined”, set “Test Transponder Frequency”
manually.
Test Transponder Frequency
89 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
∫ Preferred Language
Play Video ( AVCHD ) on BD-RE / BD-R
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
1 Press [3, 4] to select the item.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the language or item.
Set when you are playing a disc that has high definition video
(AVCHD) recorded by the Panasonic’s video camera, etc. and
high definition quality title that was recorded on this unit.
≥It can be played regardless of the setting for discs that do not
have both recorded.
You can select up to 2 different subtitles, audio tracks and teletext to
be used when multi audio, subtitles and teletext digital broadcasts
are received. Select the order of priority.
If the selected language is not available, then the original language
will be selected.
Multi Audio
Multi Audio ( alternative )
Playback high definition video (AVCHD)
[Off]
Playback high definition quality title
BD-Live
You can restrict Internet access when BD-Live functions are used.
Subtitles
Subtitles ( alternative )
Teletext Character Set
[East 1]
[East 2]
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Dutch]
[Spanish]
[Portuguese]
[Italian]
[Turkish]
[Danish]
[Swedish]
[Finnish]
[Norwegian]
[Polish]
[Basque]
[Catalan]
[Corsican]
[Galician]
[Czech]
[Greek]
[Luxembourgish]
[Slovak]
[Croatian]
[Slovenian]
[Estonian]
[Lithuanian]
[Original]
[West]
[On]
[On ( No Limit )]
Internet access is permitted for all BD-Live
contents.
[On ( Limit )]
Internet access is permitted only for BD-Live
contents which have content owner
certificates.
Internet access is prohibited for all BD-Live
contents without a certificate.
[Off]
Internet access is prohibited for all BD-Live
contents.
Teletext
BD-Video Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit BD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown.
It will be the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”, “BD-Video
Ratings” and “Lock” of “Internet Content Settings”.
Do not forget your PIN.
Setting ratings (When no limit is selected)
≥The default language is the language setting selected when
making the initial settings.
Preferred Subtitle Type
[Standard]
[Hard of
Hearing]
Display subtitles for people who are hard of
hearing.
[No Limit]
All BD-Video can be played.
[0 to 254 year(s)]
Prohibits play of BD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
≥Changing settings [When 0 to 254 year(s) is selected]
[Unlock Recorder]
[Change Level]
[Temporary Unlock]
HDD / Disc
DVD-Video Ratings
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Ratings” is
displayed.)
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown. It will be the
common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”, “BD-Video Ratings” and
“Lock” of “Internet Content Settings”.
Do not forget your PIN.
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
Settings for Playback
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Soundtrack
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Soundtrack for
BD-Video / DVD-Video” is displayed.)
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Spanish]
[Dutch]
[Swedish]
[Italian]
[Original]
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
[8 No Limit]
All DVD-Video can be played.
[1 to 7]
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All]
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
≥The default language is the language setting selected when
making the initial settings.
[Unlock Recorder]
Subtitles
DivX Subtitle Text
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Subtitles for
BD-Video / DVD-Video” is displayed.)
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will
automatically appear if available on that disc.
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Spanish]
[Dutch]
[Swedish]
Select a suitable item according to the language used for DivX
subtitles text (> 45).
≥This item is displayed only when pressing [DISPLAY] after
playing back a file.
[Italian]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Menu for BDVideo / DVD-Video” is displayed.)
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Spanish]
[Dutch]
[Swedish]
[Italian]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
≥The default language is the language setting selected when
making the initial settings.
[Latin 1]
English, German, Spanish, etc.
[Latin 2]
Polish, Czech, Hungarian, etc.
[Cyrillic]
Russian, etc.
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Enter a code (> 104) with the numbered buttons.
When the selected language is not available on the disc, the
default language is played. There are discs where you can only
switch the language from the menu screen (> 21).
[BD-V] [DVD-V]
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you
make here.
§
Menu
[Change Level]
[Temporary Unlock]
Convenient
functions
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
RQT9434
89
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
90 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Changing the unit’s settings
Settings for Recording
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
(> 30, Recording modes and approximate recording times).
[6 hours]
You can record for 6 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
[8 hours]
You can record for 8 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
≥The sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when
using “8 hours”.
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying in HG, HX, HE,
HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode.
[Automatic]
The title will be recorded with the original aspect
ratio at the time when recording started (including
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).
[16:9]
[4:3]
≥In the following cases, the programme will be recorded with the
original aspect ratio.
– [BD-RE] [BD-R] When the recording mode is set to “XP”, “SP”,
“LP”, “EP” or “FR”
– [HDD] [RAM] When the recording mode is set to “XP”, “SP”,
“LP”, “EP” or “FR” with the “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to
“Off”
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
– When recording to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
Chapter Creation
Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 51)
[Automatic]
[Off]
[5 minutes]
No chapter start points are set.
Rec for High Speed Copy
You can copy titles recorded in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode from
the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW using high speed mode. However, screen
size, etc. is restricted (> below).
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is valid for the following cases:
– Recording from an external equipment (including DV
equipment)
– Copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
[On]
RQT9434
90
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded
titles.
– Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set
in “Aspect for Recording” (> above).
– Select the type of audio in advance from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 91).
– You are no longer able to switch the audio when
watching a programme on an input channel on
the TV connected to this unit.
BD / DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Blu-ray Disc /
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” is displayed.)
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible discs).
[Maximum]
[Normal
( Silent )]
The noise generated by this unit is less than when
“Maximum” is selected, however the time required
for copying will double (approximately).
Start Recording Time
This function sets the timer recording to start earlier than the TV
Guide time.
[1 min earlier]
[3 min earlier]
[5 min earlier]
[10 min earlier]
[Off]
Finish Recording Time
This function sets the timer recording to stop later than the TV
Guide time.
[1 min later]
[3 min later]
[5 min later]
[10 min later]
[Off]
HDD Management
≥Press and hold [OK] for 3 seconds to show the following settings.
Delete all titles
Delete all titles.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
Format HDD
Format of the HDD is performed.
Formatting deletes all contents, and they cannot be restored.
Check carefully before proceeding.
Picture
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Still Mode
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (> 118,
Frames and fields).
[Automatic]
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected. (The picture is coarser.)
[Frame]
Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture
is clearer and finer.)
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
≥It is not valid for titles in DR mode or AVCHD videos.
[On]
The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.
[Off]
The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
NTSC Video Output
[Off]
Select how the NTSC image is output.
[Note]
Titles recorded in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode on HDD cannot be
copied to BD-RE or BD-R using high speed mode, regardless of
the above setting.
[NTSC]
Output as NTSC.
[PAL60]
Convert and output as PAL60.
Select this when connected to the PAL format TV.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
91 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Sound
Digital Audio Output
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
[Automatic]
Downmix
Switch the downmix system for playing back multi-channel
surround sound.
≥When “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD”, “DTS/DTS-HD” or
“MPEG” is set to “Bitstream”, there are no downmix effects for the
audio output.
≥The audio output will be in “Stereo” in the following cases.
– AVCHD playback
– [BD-V]: Playback of clicking sound on the menu and audio with
secondary video in picture-in-picture mode
[Stereo]
When connected to equipment that does not
support the virtual surround function.
[Surround
encoded]
When connected to equipment that supports the
virtual surround function
Bilingual Audio Selection
(Only when recording from DV input)
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:
≥Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+RW.
≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is enabled. (> 90)
≥Recording sound in LPCM (> 92, “Audio Mode for XP
Recording”).
[M 1]
[M 2]
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.
It will be converted to 48 kHz regardless of the setting in following
cases.
≥The signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz.
≥The disc has copy protection.
≥“BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “On”. ([BD-V])
[On]
Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment cannot process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
[Off]
Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment can process signals with a sampling
frequency of 96 kHz.)
Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD§1
DTS/DTS-HD§2
MPEG§1
Select to output Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
DTS Digital Surround, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD
Master Audio or MPEG as bitstream or PCM.
[Note]
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
≥If the unit is connected with the HDMI AV OUT terminal, the
specifications of the connected equipment take preference over
this unit and audio selected in these items may not be output
(e.g., when a television is connected, the HDMI audio output of
this unit is limited to down-mixed 2ch.)
[Bitstream]
Select “Bitstream” when the connected equipment
can decode the respective audio format.
– Connect equipment supporting HDMI Ver.
1.3a (High Bit Rate Audio) and use a High
Speed HDMI Cable in order to output High Bit
Rate Audio such as Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio or
DTS-HD Master Audio.
[PCM]
Select “PCM” when the connected equipment
cannot decode the respective audio format.
≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.
≥When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (> 92).
Refer to the operating instructions for connected
devices to verify whether or not they can decode
each of the audio formats.
Set the speaker output on the amplifier when
output with PCM.
BD-Video Secondary Audio
([BD-V] with secondary audio)
Turn on/off the clicking sound on the menu and audio with
secondary video.
[On]
The sampling frequency is converted to 48 kHz.
Audio will be converted to Dolby Digital or DTS
during playback of the BD-Video with secondary
audio when “Bitstream” (> above) is selected.
[Off]
Output in original audio method.
§1
§2
The default setting is “PCM”.
The default setting is “Bitstream”.
Convenient
functions
[BD-V] [DVD-V]
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
[Off]
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Dynamic Range Compression
[On]
午後４時２１分
RQT9434
91
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
92 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Changing the unit’s settings
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
[Dolby Digital] (> 118)
[LPCM] (> 119)
≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of
normal XP mode recordings.
≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 91).
Screen Saver
This is to prevent burn-in on the screen.
≥When this is set to “On”, the masked-off area on the screen
becomes grey.
[Only when connecting with an HDMI cable or a component video
cable and “HDMI Video Format” (> 93) is set to any other mode
than “576p/480p”, or “Component Resolution” (> 94) is set to
“720p” or “1080i”]
If there is no operation for a while or more, the
displayed screen switches to the other states
automatically.
– When the DIRECT NAVIGATOR, TV Guide,
Timer recording list, Copying list or
FUNCTION MENU, etc. is displayed, the screen
saver is not displayed.
– When Music is played, the display returns to the
screen saver mode. (Playback continues.)
– When still pictures are shown (except for
slideshows), the display returns to the Picture
View screen.
– The display returns to the screen saver mode
when it is paused by the Pause Live TV. (Pause
status will continue.)
[On]
Audio Mode for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
input terminal (> 60).
[Stereo 1]
Records audio (L1, R1).
[Stereo 2]
Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
[Mix]
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
≥When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 91).
Audio Channels for HG / HX / HE / HL Recording
This will set the audio when copying DR mode titles to BD-RE or
BD-R disc in “HG”, “HX”, “HE”, or “HL” mode, or converting the
recording mode to “HG”, “HX”, “HE”, or “HL” mode (> 50).
[Off]
Teletext
Select the Teletext display mode. (> 28)
[5.1-channel]§
Record using 5.1 ch audio
[2-channel]
Record using 2 ch audio.
§
If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is
mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output
from two front speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch
speaker connection.
[List]
When switching Teletext display mode to
List mode.
Blue LED
[On]
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Language
Choose the language for these menus and on-screen messages.
[English]
[Français]
[Italiano]
≥The default language is the language setting selected when
making the initial settings.
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (> 27) disappears automatically.
The length of time the Control Panel (> 77) is displayed can also
be changed, but “Off” does not work.
[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)
[3 sec.]
When switching Teletext display mode to
either TOP mode or FLOF (FASTEXT)
mode.
Set the lighting method for the lamp on the SD card slot.
Display
[Deutsch]
[TOP (FLOF)]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[10 sec.]
Unit’s Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save” (> 95)
to “On”.
[Bright]
[Dim]
[Automatic]
The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily
if a button is pressed. While using this mode, the
standby power consumption can be reduced.
[SD inserted]
When this unit is turned on and SD card is inserted,
the lamp is lighted.
[Off]
Connection
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.
TV Aspect
Set to match the type of television connected.
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
[16:9]
[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is trimmed for
16:9 picture.
This setting may not work and the
pictures may be shown in the
letterbox style depending on the
content.
[Letterbox]
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television. 16:9 picture is shown in
the letterbox style.
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen
television.
RQT9434
92
[4:3]
Picture output expands left or right.
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect with side
panels.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
93 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
TV System
午後４時２１分
HDMI Connection
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles
on the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Mode
Select “On” when video is output from HDMI AV OUT terminal.
[NTSC]
≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television.
≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input
from other equipment.
≥Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the
HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.
≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
≥Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on the
HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.
[Note]
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.)
≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be used.
≥A disc or title with different “TV System” may not be able to
playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording.
You will be able to playback by changing the “TV System” settings
in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording, change
back the settings before the recording starts.
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
∫ Types of disc or title recorded on HDD, BD-RE or
BD-R for the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD, BD-RE or BD-R using PAL or NTSC, refer to
this table.
(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
TV type
Multi-system
TV
PAL TV
Disc/Titles recorded on HDD,
BD-RE or BD-R
Yes/No
PAL
≤
NTSC
≤
§1
[Off]
≤
§1
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may
be improved by changing the setting.
≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to
connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is
connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must also be
1080p compatible.
[576p/480p]
[720p]
–
NTSC
≤§2
Select “PAL60” for “NTSC Video Output” in the Setup menu
(> 90). If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60
signals the picture will not be shown correctly.
§2
Select “NTSC” in “TV System”.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R,
ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or
NTSC).
All images other than 720p will be output as 1080i.
[1080i]
[1080p]
When outputting 1080p signal, we recommend
using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the
HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are less
than 5.0 meters to prevent video distortion etc.
[Automatic]
Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p or 576p/480p).
≥Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) for more than 5 seconds
when the image is disturbed by changing the setting. It will be
set to “576p/480p”.
BD-Video 24p Output
When playing BD-Video recorded in 24 frames, this unit displays
each frame at 1/24 second intervals–the same interval originally
shot with the film movie.
≥This item is effective only when the unit is connected to a TV
with an HDMI terminal that supports 1080/24p input.
[On]
(PAL60)
PAL
When the equipment such as amplifiers is connected
using HDMI cable, and TV is connected to the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal (setup before
connecting to the amplifiers.)
HDMI Video Format
≤
PAL
NTSC
NTSC TV
[On]
≥Images in 24p are output in 24p as they are.
(Only when the “HDMI Video Format” is “Automatic” or
“1080p”)
However,
– when video is being output at 24 frames, images from
any other terminal than the HDMI terminal may not be
output properly.
– when images other than 24p are played, images are
output at 60p.
[Off]
HDMI Audio Output
[On]
[Off]
When connected to TV with HDMI cable, and connected
to amplifiers not compatible to HDMI with a DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT terminal
7.1ch Audio Reformatting [BD-V]
[Automatic]
Surround audio of less than 7.1 ch will be output as
7.1 ch automatically.
“Automatic” is enabled in the following cases:
– When the connected device supports 7.1 channel
surround audio
– “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD” in the Setup
menu (> 91) is set to “PCM”
– When the audio is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD or LPCM
[Off]
It is output via the original channels. However,
surround audio of DTS and DTS-HD will be output
as 7.1 ch automatically.
Convenient
functions
[PAL]
VIERA Link
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
[On]
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
RQT9434
93
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
94 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Changing the unit’s settings
Component Resolution
This sets the video output resolution when using the component
video terminal.
[576i/480i]
[576p/480p]
[720p]
[1080i]
≥You cannot change the setting while the “HDMI Video Mode” is
set to “On”. Set the “HDMI Video Mode” to “Off” and set the “AV1
Output” to “Video ( with component )” or “S Video ( with
component )”.
≥If it is set to “720p”, images other than “720p” will be output as
“1080i”.
≥The video output resolution will be restricted to “576p/480p” even
if you select “720p” or “1080i” when viewing or recording the
following images:
– Some programmes in the HD format
– DVD-Video discs
– DivX
– BD-Video discs recorded at a rate of 50 field per second
– Images input via AV1, AV2 or DV input
≥Press the [∫] and [1] (PLAY) for more than 5 seconds when the
image is disturbed by changing the setting. It will be set to “576i/
480i”.
Network Settings
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
IP Address / DNS Settings (> 96)
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Connection Test
IP Address Auto-assignment
[On]
[Off]
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
DNS-IP Auto-assignment
[On]
[Off]
Primary DNS
AV1 Output
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
Select “Video ( with component )” or “S Video ( with component )”
for component output (progressive output).
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1 ( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.
When a decoder is connected, do not set to “RGB 1 ( without
component )”.
Connection Speed Auto-configure
[Video ( with component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
This is enabled only when “Connection Speed Auto-configure” is
turned “Off”.
[S Video ( with component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video
signal.
[10BASE half duplex]
[10BASE full duplex]
[100BASE half duplex]
[100BASE full duplex]
[RGB 1 ( without component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If
you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
Secondary DNS
[On]
[Off]
Connection Speed Setting
Proxy Server Settings (> 97)
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Initialize
Set the setting of the “Proxy Server Settings” back.
[RGB 2 ( without component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If
you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
Proxy Address
AV2 Settings
Proxy Port Number
Set to match the connected equipment.
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
(The initial setting is “0”.)
Connection Test
AV2 Input
Set to “RGB / Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording RGB
output from external equipment.
[RGB / Video]
[RGB]
[Video]
[S Video]
Ext Link
This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to
“NTSC” (> 93).
[Ext Link 1]
[Ext Link 2]
(The initial setting is blank.)
When a Set Top Box etc. which transmits a special
control signal recordings via the 21-pin Scart cable
is connected.
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled
by the control signal.
When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
When it turns on, recording starts.
When it turns off, recording stops.
Common Interface
Access to software contained on Common Interface (CI) modules.
(> 16, 19) Follow the on-screen instructions.
Internet Content Settings (> 97)
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Lock
You can restrict using VIERA CAST.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown. It will be
the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”, “BD-Video Ratings”,
and “Lock”.
Do not forget your PIN.
[On]
[Off]
Automatic Volume Control
[On]
[Off]
Select “Off” when the audio is warped while
using VIERA CAST.
Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings (> 97)
You will be able to access this unit from Panasonic DLNA
compatible equipment on the network by registering them to this
unit.
It is also possible to change the name of this unit on the network.
Server ( DLNA ) Settings (> 97)
By allowing access from non-Panasonic DLNA compatible
equipment on the network, it allows them to access this unit.
RQT9434
94
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
95 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Others
PIN Entry
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Automatic Standby
Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.
[2 hours]
[6 hours]
[4 hours]
[Off]
Remote Control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together.
[BD 1]
午後４時２１分
[BD 2]
This PIN will be used for following controlling
– BD-Video playback
– DVD-Video playback
– Using VIERA CAST
≥Make a note of PIN in case you forget it.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the number, then press [1].
≥You can also use the numbered buttons.
2 Repeat step 1 for enter 4-digit PIN.
3 Press [OK] to confirm.
PIN Entry
[BD 3]
Remember the PIN.
Use “BD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
0
1 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“BD 1”, “BD 2” or “BD 3”)
and press [OK].
To change the code on the remote control
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.
3 Press [OK].
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
unit’s display
The unit’s remote control code
0
0
0
OK
Power Save
[On]
Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to
standby (> 115).
[Off]
It is possible to start quickly from standby mode.
≥“Unit’s Display” (> 92) is fixed with “Automatic” when “Power
Save” is set to “On”, and is changed to “Bright” when “Power
Save” is set to “Off”.
≥This function cannot be enabled when the DLNA function is
enabled in "Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings" or "Server ( DLNA )
Settings". (> 94)
System Update (> 98)
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(> step 2).
[Note]
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main
unit code to “BD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(> step 2).
In order to update this unit’s software (firmware) and to support
system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically
performs software (firmware) updates.
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Software Update in Standby
[0:00 to 23:00]§
Clock
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital
broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a day.
However, if the time is not set correctly, use the settings listed in the
method below.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [OK].
Time Zone > below
Clock
Time
15
Automatic
OK
45
39
Date
27
5
§
Default setting is “3:00”.
Software Licence
Information about the software licence is displayed.
DivX Registration
Time Zone
Off
[Off]
2009
Please set the clock.
OK: access RETURN: leave
RETURN
When you select “Off”
2 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
3 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
∫ To change the Time Zone
When the time is not correct, set “Time Zone” (GMT -6 to + 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “On” of “Automatic” and press [OK] in
step 1.
Auto clock setting starts. This takes a few minutes.
“Automatic clock setting completed.” screen is displayed.
2 Press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the correct time zone and press [OK].
4 Press [RETURN ].
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Videoon-Demand (VOD) content (> 45).
Initialize
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
All the settings except for the ratings level and ratings PIN return
to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.
[Yes]
[No]
Default Settings
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,
language settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
PIN, remote control code, network settings etc. return to the
factory presets.
[Yes]
[No]
Convenient
functions
Automatic
When you set this unit to standby mode,
software (firmware) updates and TV Guide
data are downloaded automatically at the
specified time.
RQT9434
95
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
96 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Changing the unit’s settings
∫ Setting the IP address
Network Settings
These settings are used if you will connect this unit to a network.
The connection to the Internet may take time or the internet may not
be connected depending on the connection environment.
It is recommended that you use a broadband connection.
Preparation
Connect to the network. (> 103)
∫ Testing the connection
Always test the connection when a LAN cable is connected or when
new “IP Address / DNS Settings” have been made.
1
2
3
4
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Network Settings” and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “IP Address / DNS
Settings” and press [OK].
IP Address / DNS Settings
䋭䋭
Connection Test
IP Address Auto-assignment
On
IP Address
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
Subnet Mask
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
Gateway Address
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
DNS-IP Auto-assignment
On
Primary DNS
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
Secondary DNS
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
Connection Speed Auto-configure
On
Connection Speed Setting
䋭䋭
MAC Address: 00-0b-97-e6-7a-ae
OK
RETURN
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Test” and
press [OK].
“Testing”: The test is in progress.
“OK”:
The connection is completed.
“Failed”: Please check the connection and settings.
[Note]
≥Perform the “Connection Test” also when any change was made to
the “IP Address / DNS Settings”.
≥If the connection test fails, it may be necessary to set the MAC
address of this unit at the router side. The MAC address can be
displayed by selecting “Network Settings” and “IP Address / DNS
Settings” in steps 1–5 (> above).
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making
any changes.
Set the IP address only when the router has no DHCP server
functions or when the router’s DHCP server function is disabled.
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
6 Press [3, 4] to select “IP Address Autoassignment” and press [2, 1] to select “Off”.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “IP Address”, “Subnet
Mask” or “Gateway Address” and press [OK].
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
≥After checking the specifications for your broadband router,
enter each number.
If the number is unknown, then check the number of other
devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN
cable. Assign a different number from those of other devices for
the “IP Address” and the same number for others.
≥If a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].
IP Address
Please input IP address and press “OK”.
The IP address will be cleared by pressing
“OK” when there is no number input.
Press “DEL” button if a wrong number is
entered.
192
.
1
.
.
0 - 9 Number
9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥The numeric input range is between 0 and 255.
∫ Setting the DNS-IP
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making
any changes.
When setting an assigned DNS server from your internet service
provider, perform the following settings.
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
6 Press [3, 4] to select “DNS-IP Autoassignment” and press [2, 1] to select “Off”.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Primary DNS” or
“Secondary DNS”and press [OK].
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
≥Follow the instructions given by your internet service provider
and enter the numbers.
If the number is unknown, then check the number of other
devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN
cable and assign the same number.
≥If a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].
9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥The numeric input range is between 0 and 255.
∫ Setting the connection speed
When the connection test results in “Failed” after the IP and DNS-IP
addresses are assigned, perform the following settings.
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Speed Autoconfigure” and press [2, 1] to select “Off”.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Speed
Setting” and press [2, 1] to select a
connection speed.
≥Select a connection speed in accordance with the environment
of the network connected.
≥When the settings are changed, the network connection may be
disabled depending on the device.
RQT9434
96
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
97 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
∫ Setting the proxy server
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making
any changes.
Please use this setting when instructed to by your Internet service
provider.
≥Set the proxy server only after the connection test is completed
properly.
午後４時２１分
∫ Register the DLNA compatible equipment to this
unit
After performing steps 1–4 (> 96, Testing the connection)
≥When connecting Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment
5 Select “Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings” and
press [OK].
After performing steps 1–4 (> 96, Testing the connection)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Proxy Server Settings”
and press [OK].
Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings
Home Network ( DLNA )
Off
Registered devices list
Proxy Server Settings
Initialize
Proxy Address
Proxy Port Number
0
Connection Test
----
Set unit name
OK
RETURN
6 Select “On” and press [OK].
7 Select “Yes” and press [OK].
OK
RETURN
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Test” and
press [OK].
“Testing”:
“OK”:
The test is in progress.
The connection is completed.
Press [RETURN ] to exit.
Please check the connection and settings.
“Failed”:
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Proxy Address” and
press [OK].
(> 80, Entering text)
After the input of “Proxy Address” is completed
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Proxy Port Number” and
press [OK].
9 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
Access this unit from the connected DLNA compatible
equipment within 10 minutes.
≥Up to 4 devices can be registered.
≥Even if it is Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment, you may not
be able to register from "Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings".
In such a case, register the equipment from "Server ( DLNA )
Settings" (> below)
≥When connecting non-Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment
5 Select “Server ( DLNA ) Settings” and press
[OK].
Server ( DLNA ) Settings
Server ( DLNA ) function
Off
MAC Address
Proxy Port Number
Please input HTTP Proxy Server Port Number
and press “OK”. The number will be set to “0”
by pressing “OK” when there is no number
input. Press “DEL” button if a wrong number
is entered.
OK
0
RETURN
≥Up to 4 devices can be registered.
0 - 9 Number
10 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To set back to default setting
After performing step 5 (> above)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Initialize” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
∫ Setting the internet content (VIERA CAST)
After performing steps 1–4 (> 96, Testing the connection)
6 Select the MAC Address for the connected
equipment and press [OK].
≥Up to 12 devices can display the MAC Address.
7 Select “Yes” and press [OK].
∫ Viewing video in this unit via the registered
equipment (> 79, DLNA feature)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Internet Content
Settings” and press [OK].
Internet Content Settings
Lock
Off
On
OK
RETURN
Convenient
functions
Automatic Volume Control
≥Lock (> 94)
≥Automatic Volume Control
Select “On”, the volume is controlled by this unit automatically. If
you want to enjoy the original volume, set it to “Off”.
RQT9434
97
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
98 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Software (firmware) Update
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress
may damage the unit. Don’t remove the AC mains lead during
the update.
Update software (firmware) of this unit
Software (firmware) of this unit can be updated automatically by
following method.
≥From broadcasts
≥From Internet [network connection and setting is required. (> 96,
103)]
Update of the software (firmware) is done when it is in standby
mode.
Once the new software (firmware) is found, it will start the download
of the software (firmware), and then the upload.
Download of the software (firmware) will start automatically when the
power of this unit is turned off or when the set time comes (> 95)
≥The time it takes to update depends on the connection.
– For Broadcast: About 2 to 4 hours
– For Internet: About 1 hour
(It may take longer than specified above to download because
the download time differs depending on the network
environment. It is recommended to be used in a broadband
environment.)
Time to start the download of the software (firmware) can be set
arbitrarily. If you do not want to perform the software (firmware)
update during the standby mode, set the "Software Update in
Standby" in the Setup menu to "Off". (> 95)
∫ The unit’s display during the update
e.g.,
CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional
Access Module) software (firmware)
update
≥Software (firmware) of CAM (compatible CI Plus) can be updated
automatically from broadcasts.
≥Availability of software (firmware) update is detected while viewing
the programmes compatible with CI Plus.
Notification is displayed on the screen if available.
≥Notice is not displayed in the following cases:
– When recording a programme
– When scheduled recording and update occur simultaneously
– When displaying FUNCTION MENU, DIRECT NAVIGATOR, etc.
Follow the on-screen instructions when updating.
∫ The unit’s display during the update
e.g.,
≥If you did not update or if the notice for update did not display on
the screen, you will be notified on the Digital Channel Information
of the channel where the update for CAM was detected.
1 ZDF
Bruder
0:50 - 2:30
Now
Encrypted
Dolby D
12:55 All DVB Channels
Change category
CAM Upgrade Info
MULTI
/
To perform an update, press the "Red” button and follow the onscreen instructions.
≥“SW-DL” : Software (firmware) is downloading.
Download will stop when the power is turned on, or the timer
recording starts.
≥“START” : Update of the software (firmware) will start once the
download is completed.
≥“UPD / ” : Software (firmware) is updating.
≥“FINISH” : Updated of the software (firmware) has completed.
[Note]
≥If the timer recording is scheduled within the following time at the
start of the download, the download will not be executed.
– For broadcast: Within 4 hours
– For Internet: Within 1 hour
≥If downloading on this unit fails or this unit is not connected to the
Internet, then you can download the latest software (firmware) from
the following website and burn it to a CD-R to update the software
(firmware).
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
RQT9434
98
[Note]
≥Operations such as view, playback, or record cannot be performed
while updating the CAM.
If you press the [Í] on the remote control while updating the CAM,
the power of this unit will turn off automatically after the update.
≥For details, refer to your CAM’s operating instructions or consult
your dealer.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
99 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Other Settings
2
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
Turn TV on/off
DRIVE
SELECT
Channel
Select
TV
VOL
Input select
Volume
PAGE
1
2abc 3def
4ghi 5jkl 6mno
7p 8
1
CH
AV
01:
[Note]
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
HOLD function
9w
[0] > [1]
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
CH
Point the remote control at the
television
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
10:
[1] > [0]
The HOLD function deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
Press and hold [OK] and
[RETURN ]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
Manufacturer and Code No.
Code
01/02/03/04
35
27/30
33
05/71/72/73/74
58/59
09
10/15
05
66
69
05
64/65
05
05
05
10/34
61
21
53
63/67
05/50/51
05
36
09
52
05/22/23/40/41
05
30
25
49
17/30/39/70
52
45
62
05/50/51
07/46
MAG
52
Brand
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
NEC
NOBLEX
NOKIA
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
ONWA
ORION
PEONY
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
RADIOLA
SABA
SALORA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SCHNEIDER
SEG
SELECO
SHARP
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
TCL
TELEFUNKEN
TEVION
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
YAMAHA
Code
05/28
05/19/20/47
24
36
33
25/26/27/60/61
10
45
30/39/70
05
49/69
41/48/64
05/06/46
05
37/38
52
05
05
10
26
32/42/43/65/68
05
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
05/69/75/76/77/78
05/25
18
09
05
08
31/33/66/67/69
10/11/12/13/14
52
52
10/15/44
16/57
05
If you press a button while the HOLD function is on, “X HOLD”
appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
To cancel the HOLD function
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN
HOLD” disappears.
] simultaneously until “X
Convenient
functions
Brand
Panasonic
AIWA
AKAI
BEJING
BEKO
BENQ
BP
BRANDT
BUSH
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
HIKONA
HITACHI
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
JINGXING
JVC
KDS
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
LOEWE
18/41
RQT9434
99
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
100 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Additional connections
Connecting a television with AUDIO/
VIDEO terminals
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Connecting a stereo amplifier
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Amplifier’s rear panel
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
R
L
AUDIO IN VIDEO
R
L
IN
Audio cable
Audio/Video cable
VIDEO
VIDEO
L
PB
R
PR
OPTICAL COAXIAL
L AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
OPTICAL COAXIAL
L AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
Y
Y
AUDIO
OUT
L
PB
R
PR
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
This unit’s rear panel
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Television’s rear panel
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
R
L
Audio cable
PR
PB
Y
Component
video cable
VIDEO
OPTICAL COAXIAL
L AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
Y
L
PB
R
PR
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
This unit’s rear panel
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (> 119) and provide a purer picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal.
[Required^setting]
“Component Resolution” setting in the Setup menu (> 94)
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is
progressive compatible. Set the “Component Resolution” in Setup
menu to “576i/480i” if you are concerned about it (> 94). This is the
same for multi system televisions using PAL mode.
CRT
DO NOT
Progressive output
This unit
RQT9434
100
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
101 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Connecting VCR or Set Top Box (Terrestrial receiver, CATV, etc.)
This unit’s rear panel
Y
PB
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
PR
AV2
(EXT)
MPONENT
DEO OUT
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or
video cassette recorder to the television, video
signal will be affected by copyright protection
systems and the picture may not be shown
correctly.
≥When connecting to a television with a builtin VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television
side if there are both television and VCR input
terminals.
21-pin Scart cable
DO NOT
Television
VCR
This unit
AV
VCR or Set Top Box’s
rear panel
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal
[Required^setting]
≥“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (> 91)
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital audio cable or coaxial cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable,
you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting “HDMI Audio Output” to “Off” in the Setup menu (> 93). In this case audio is
only output from the amplifier not the television.
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included), check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
∫ With OPTICAL
∫ With COAXIAL
Amplifier’s rear panel
Amplifier’s rear panel
COAXIAL IN
OPTICAL IN
Optical digital audio
cable
Do not bend sharply
when connecting.
VIDEO
L
This unit’s rear panel
R
Y
PB
This unit’s
rear panel
VIDEO
Y
L
PB
R
PR
PR
LNB
IN 2
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
Coaxial cable
DISH
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Convenient
functions
Insert the cable so its
shape fits correctly into
the terminal.
RQT9434
101
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
102 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Additional connections
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM, High Bit Rate Audio) technology (> 118, 119).
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[> 76, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear
panel
AV
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
Connecting with a Panasonic TV
(VIERA)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is
connected, the following functions
are available.
≥Direct TV Recording (> 76)
≥Pause Live TV programme (> 77)
Receiver’s rear
panel
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
HDMI cable
This unit’s rear
panel
VIDEO
1
2
HDMI AV OUT
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
Y
L
PB
R
PR
COMMON INTERFACE
LNB
IN 1
13V/18V
400mA max.
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
[Required^setting]
≥Set “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI
Audio Output” to “On” (> 93).
(The default setting is “On”.)
AV2
(EXT)
LNB
IN 2
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
[Note]
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 118) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9434
102
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
103 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Network connection
Following function will be available when this unit is connected to the network.
≥This document is assuming that you already have a broadband connection.
≥This connection is not necessary if following functions are not to be used.
Playing back from other
equipment on the network
You can enjoy the video saved on the HDD of this unit on DLNA compatible equipment connected via a
network. (> 79)
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM
You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home screen with VIERA CAST, for example
YouTube, Picasa Web Albums. (Current as of December 2009) (> 78)
≥VIERA CAST requires a broadband Internet connection. Dial-up Internet connections cannot be used.
Enjoying BD-Live discs with
Internet
You can enjoy more functions such as subtitles, exclusive images and online games by connecting this unit
to the Internet. (> 46)
Automatically acquire the
title of the CD
Automatically acquire the title of the CD or the information about the artist. (> 75)
Update the software
(firmware) of this unit
Automatically update the software (firmware) of this unit. (> 98)
≥Update of the software (firmware) can be done from the broadcast too.
Internet
This unit’s rear panel
VIDEO
1
2
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
AC IN
Y
L
PB
R
PR
COMMON INTERFACE
LNB
IN 1
13V/18V
400mA max.
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
AV2
(EXT)
LNB
IN 2
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO
Straight LAN cable
Straight LAN cable
Hub or broadband router
Telecommunications
equipment (modem, etc)
DLNA compatible
equipment
≥When your communication equipment (modem), etc. has no broadband
router functions: Connect a broadband router.
When your communication equipment (modem), etc. has broadband
router functions but there are no vacant ports: Connect a hub.
≥The DLNA compatible device that is to be connected to the unit should be
connected to the same hub or broadband router as the unit.
≥Use a router that supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.
[Note]
≥Refer to the operating instructions for the connected device.
≥It may not work properly depending on the equipment or environment used.
≥Depending on the contract with the provider, you may not be able to connect multiple numbers of terminals such as this unit or computers, or an
additional fee might be required.
≥Use only category 5 straight LAN cables (STP) when connecting to peripheral devices.
≥When operating the VIERA CAST, use high-speed internet service no less than 1.5 Mbps for SD (Standard Definition) and 6 Mbps for HD (High
Definition) picture quality by your local broadband company.
≥If using slow Internet connection, the video may not be displayed correctly.
≥Inserting any cable other than a LAN cable in the LAN terminal can damage the unit.
Convenient
functions
≥Make the necessary settings in “Network Settings” after connecting. (> 94)
RQT9434
103
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
104 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Operations that can be performed simultaneously
Reference
Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a title
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Playback of HDD
Playback of
discs
Playback of BDVideo
Playback of still
pictures
Playback of
music recorded
on HDD
While recording to HDD in DR mode
≤
≤
≤
–
≤
While recording to HDD in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR
modes
≤
≤§
–
–
≤
While recording from DV input
–
–
–
–
–
While copying in normal speed mode
–
–
–
–
–
While copying in high speed mode
[With finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW])]
–
–
–
–
–
While copying in high speed mode
[Without finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW])]
≤
–
–
–
–
[AVCHD] It cannot playback.
≥Simultaneous operation is not possible while executing the “DV Automatic Recording” or “Flexible Recording via AV input”.
§
Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
Starting of timer recording possible during the following
operations
Starting of timer recording not possible during the following
operations
≥Recording the title§1, §2, §3
≥Playing the title§4
≥Editing the title
≥Copying a title in high speed mode (without finalising or creating
Top Menu)
– Only 1 programme can be recorded
≥Executing “DV Automatic Recording”§1, §5
≥Executing “Flexible Recording via AV input”§1, §5
≥Executing Pause Live TV§1, §2
≥Copying a title in normal speed mode
≥Copying a title in high speed mode (with finalising or creating Top
Menu)
≥Copying HD Video (AVCHD format)
≥Editing still pictures or music
≥Copying still pictures
≥Copying music
≥Formatting
≥Finalising/Creating Top Menu ([+RW])
§1
§2
§3
§4
§5
Cannot be executed when “One cable” has been selected in Auto
Setup (> 18, 87)
Executing operation will terminate when 2 programmes
simultaneous recording cannot be performed.
While recording an encrypted broadcast, you cannot record
another encrypted broadcast.
Playback of disc will terminate when the timer recording to disc is
started while playing back from the disc or when the timer
recording other than the DR mode has started while playing BDVideo.
Executing operation will be terminated.
Language code list
Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
6566
Afar:
6565
Afrikaans:
6570
Albanian:
8381
Amharic:
6577
Arabic:
6582
Armenian:
7289
Assamese:
6583
Aymara:
6589
Azerbaijani:
6590
Bashkir:
6665
Basque:
6985
Bengali; Bangla:
6678
Bhutani:
6890
Bihari:
6672
Breton:
6682
Bulgarian:
6671
Burmese:
7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian:
7577
RQT9434
104
Catalan:
Chinese:
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dutch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnish:
French:
Frisian:
Galician:
Georgian:
German:
Greek:
Greenlandic:
Guarani:
6765
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
Gujarati:
Hausa:
Hebrew:
Hindi:
Hungarian:
Icelandic:
Indonesian:
Interlingua:
Irish:
Italian:
Japanese:
Javanese:
Kannada:
Kashmiri:
Kazakh:
Kirghiz:
Korean:
Kurdish:
Laotian:
Latin:
Latvian, Lettish:
7185
7265
7387
7273
7285
7383
7378
7365
7165
7384
7465
7487
7578
7583
7575
7589
7579
7585
7679
7665
7686
Lingala:
Lithuanian:
Macedonian:
Malagasy:
Malay:
Malayalam:
Maltese:
Maori:
Marathi:
Moldavian:
Mongolian:
Nauru:
Nepali:
Norwegian:
Oriya:
Pashto, Pushto:
Persian:
Polish:
Portuguese:
Punjabi:
Quechua:
7678
7684
7775
7771
7783
7776
7784
7773
7782
7779
7778
7865
7869
7879
7982
8083
7065
8076
8084
8065
8185
Rhaeto-Romance:
8277
Romanian:
8279
Russian:
8285
Samoan:
8377
Sanskrit:
8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian:
8382
Serbo-Croatian: 8372
Shona:
8378
Sindhi:
8368
Singhalese:
8373
Slovak:
8375
Slovenian:
8376
Somali:
8379
Spanish:
6983
Sundanese:
8385
Swahili:
8387
Swedish:
8386
Tagalog:
8476
Tajik:
8471
Tamil:
Tatar:
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tigrinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof:
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
105 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Frequently asked questions
Set up
Can this unit receive or record High Definition
(HD) broadcasts?
¾ Yes, this unit can receive or record High Definition (HD)
broadcasts. Record in DR recording mode.
What do I need to play multi channel surround
sound?
¾ Title in DR mode on the HDD can be copied to BD-RE or BD-R
at high speed.
Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card, or USB
memory after copying HD video (AVCHD format)
to the HDD?
¾ It can be copied to the disc.
– [BD-RE] [BD-R] It can be copied with HD quality.
– [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] It will be copied with
SD quality. (It cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality.)
¾ It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.
¾ Connect the appropriate amplifier/receiver to the HDMI AV OUT
terminal, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (OPTICAL,
COAXIAL). (> 101, 102)
TV Guide
Are the headphones and speakers directly
connected to the unit?
Is it possible to programme a recording, with a
start and end time that are different from the TV
Guide system?
¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through
the amplifier etc. (> 100, 101, 102)
My television has Scart terminal, COMPONENT
VIDEO IN terminals and HDMI IN terminal. Which
should I connect with?
¾ The different levels of picture quality input are listed below in
order from highest to lowest.
HDMI IN )COMPONENT VIDEO IN ) Scart)VIDEO IN.
However, it will take longer for the picture output to start up
when this unit is connected with the HDMI IN terminal.
When are the software (firmware) updates
broadcast?
¾ The unit shows automatically when a software (firmware)
update has been broadcast, and also automatically updates the
software (firmware) if the time is specified in “Software Update
in Standby”. (> 95)
Disc
Can I play BD-Video and DVD-Video bought in
another country?
¾ Playback of the following discs is not possible. (> Cover)
– BD-Video discs that do not include region “B”.
– DVD-Video discs that do not include region “2” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
Can BD-Video/DVD-Video that does not have a
region code/number be played?
¾ The region management information for BD-Video/DVD-Video
indicates that the disc conforms to industry standards. You
cannot play discs that do not conform to industry standards or
do not have a region code or number.
Please tell me about disc compatibility with this
unit.
¾ Refer to “HDD and disc information”. (> 6–10)
Recording
Can I record from a commercially purchased
video cassette, Blu-ray Disc or DVD?
¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes, Blu-ray Disc and DVD
are copy protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.
Can the disc recorded with this unit play on other
equipment?
¾ Refer to “Play on other players” in “HDD and disc information”.
(> 8, 9)
¾ You can change the start and end time of programmes in the
Timer Recording menu. (> 35, 90)
Can I receive TV Guide system data via a Set Top
Box?
¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with
Set Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your
unit’s manual timer programming. (> 35, 59)
How can I cancel a TIMER programming?
¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then
press [DEL]. (> 37)
What happens when I unplug the unit from the
household mains socket?
¾ The TV Guide data will not be updated.
¾ If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for
a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.
¾ Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.
USB
What can or cannot be done using the USB port
on this unit?
¾ You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB
memory. (> 44, 64, 70)
¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the
HDD, BD-RE or DVD-RAM. (> 68)
¾ You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD. (> 75)
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 63)
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy HD Video to the
HDD, BD-RE or BD-R. (> 62)
¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB
memory.
¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory
cannot be formatted on this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 11)
Music
What will happen if I try to record the same CD
multiple times?
¾ New album will be made following the existing album.
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the
disc or USB memory?
¾ No, you cannot.
Regarding Frequently asked questions for copying (> 54)
Reference
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Can I copy to a disc at high speed copy?
¾ Yes, you can. (But you may not high speed copy depending on
the disc to copy or the title.) (> 54)
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
RQT9434
105
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
106 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Messages
On the television
Authorisation Error.
≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different registration code.
You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX) (> 45)
Cannot finish recording completely.
≥The programme was copy-protected.
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded. (> 29)
Cannot play.
Incompatible TV system setting !
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system
currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 93)
Cannot record to the disc.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 15)
Cannot format.
Cannot play on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 116)
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the USB memory or card. (> 15)
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. (> 117)
No SD card
No valid SD card.
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already inserted, turn off
the unit, remove and then re-insert the card. (> 15)
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match. (> 116)
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 25, 49, 85)
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination Capacity” is not
exceeded.
The disc is not recordable.
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert an unfinalised disc.
≥You inserted an unformatted disc. (> 85)
This disc is not formatted properly.
Rental Expired.
≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it.
$ This operation cannot be
performed now.
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
– [BD-V]: During playback, reverse slow-motion or reverse frame-by-frame is not possible.
– Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform search or skip when film previews and
warning screens are being played back.
$ This operation is prohibited by
this disc.
≥Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform search or skip when film previews and
warning screens are being played back.
When removing a recorded disc
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
Finalise
Finalise the disc to enable playback on other
DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to min.
Finalise the disc ?
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
This disc cannot be played on other players
without finalising.
RQT9434
106
∫ To finalise the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu” (> 86), “Auto-Play Select” (> 86) or
“Disc Name” (> 84) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
∫ To open the tray without disc finalisation
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
107 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
BD
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
CAM-UP
≥CAM is being updated. (> 98)
GUIDE
≥TV Guide data is being downloaded. (> 38)
≥The software (firmware) update is complete. (> 98)
§
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
NoERAS
≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 15)
≥This message may appear when the lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 14)
NoWRIT
≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
PLEASE WAIT§
≥Displayed when the unit is started and turned off. This is not malfunction. It takes some minutes until the
message disappears depending on the status of the unit. You can not turn the unit on while the message is
displayed.
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its
recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the
message disappears.
PROG FULL§
≥There are already 64 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. (> 37)
REMOVE
≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.
START
≥Update of the software (firmware) is started.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. (> 98)
SW-DL
≥Software (firmware) is downloading.
Download will stop when the power is turned on, or the timer recording starts. (> 98)
UNFORMAT§
≥You inserted an unformatted BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL, or DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it. (> 85)
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
UNSUPPORT§
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. (> 6–10)
≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.
UPD /
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥The software (firmware) is being updated.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. (> 98)
U50
≥The terminal, antenna cable or dish is short-circuited as for both LNB IN 1 and LNB IN 2. Check the connection
status. (> 17)
U50 1
≥The terminal, antenna cable or dish is short-circuited as for LNB IN 1. Check the connection status. (> 17)
U50 2
≥The terminal, antenna cable or dish is short-circuited as for LNB IN 2. Check the connection status. (> 17)
U59
≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
U61
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or copy. This
is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not broken. Once the
display clears you can use the unit again.
U72
U73
≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.
– The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
– Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
– The HDMI cable is damaged.
U76
≥HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.
U77
≥Due to the current disc not having authorised copyright information, video output is not performed.
U88
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,
playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. (> 108)
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now press [Í/
I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
H
or F
X HOLD
§
≥There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following.
(> 108–114)
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform
the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
≥The HOLD function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN
The message scrolls on the unit’s display.
] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (> 99)
Reference
FINISH
HARD ERR
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than
5 seconds. (> 95)
RQT9434
107
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
108 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
Updating to the latest software (firmware) may solve the problem. (> 98)
The following do not indicate a problem with this
unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting
breaks.
≥Operations are slow to respond in power save mode.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again
using a Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being
activated. (Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for
3 seconds.)
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
Power
No power.
The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].
¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active
household mains socket. (> 17)
The clock does not display on the unit when
switched to standby.
¾ The clock does not display when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
Ensure “Power Save” is set to “Off”. (> 95)
Available disc space display is showing different
from what was used
¾ Available disc space display may be different from actual.
Varying may be large especially when recorded in DR mode.
“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be
ejected.
¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following
to eject the disc.
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on
the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
2 While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the
disc.
The unit switches to standby mode.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the
main unit to turn the unit on.
TV screen and video
The power is turned off automatically.
Television reception worsens after connecting
the unit.
¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV
with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Linkcompatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will
be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to
standby mode.
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between
the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal
booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.
The digital channel information or Control Panel
does not appear.
¾ If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)
with the “Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV,
when switching the TV input, the unit will be automatically
turned to standby. For details please read the operating
instructions of the TV.
Displays
Picture does not appear during timer recording.
The display is dim.
¾ Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (> 92)
¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.
To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the
unit on.
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.
Screen size is wrong.
¾ Set the clock. (> 95)
¾ Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does
not have that function, set “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup
menu to “Off” (> 93) and “Component Resolution” to “576i/
480i”. (> 94)
¾ Check the following setting in the Setup menu. (> 92)
– “TV Aspect”, “Aspect for 4:3 Video”
¾ Check “Aspect for Recording” before recording or file
conversion. (> 90)
¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” in the
Setup menu to “16:9”. (> 92)
The time recorded on the disc and the available
time shown do not add up.
The displayed time of this unit is different from
the actual recording time.
¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.
¾ [BD-R] [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The remaining capacity does not
increase even if titles are deleted.
¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It
does not increase if other titles are deleted.
¾ If you record or edit about 200 times or more, the remaining
capacity of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, and +R DL is reduced and
then recording or editing may be disabled (for the second layer
on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after about 60 times).
¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
Compared to the actual recorded time, the
elapsed time displayed is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
RQT9434
108
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) that the “On-Screen
Messages” in the Setup menu will be displayed. (> 92)
¾ The digital channel information will not appear during playback.
¾ The Control Panel is only displayed when connected to a TV
with “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 77)
¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the
number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to
one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour
elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56
seconds). This does not affect the recording.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to
your television’s operating instructions.
109 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Pictures do not appear with the HD quality
although HD setting was made.
The picture is distorted during play, or video will
not play correctly.
¾ Even if this unit is connected to a TV through COMPONENT
VIDEO terminals and the Component Resolution is set to 720p
or 1080i, the pictures of HD broadcast output from this unit are
output with 576p/480p.
¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor
reception or unfavourable weather conditions.
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear
briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
– between playlist chapters.
¾ Make sure the connections are pushed firmly. (> 17, 100–103)
The screen changes automatically.
¾ If there is no operation for 5 minutes or more, the displayed
screen switches to the other states automatically. (only when
the “Screen Saver” in Setup menu is set to “On”.) (> 92)
The recorded title is stretched vertically.
¾ It may have been recorded with 4:3 aspect ratio. You will be
able to view in 16:9 aspect ration by setting the “Aspect for 4:3
Video” in Setup menu to “4:3”. (> 92)
¾ If the 16:9 aspect ratio image is output to a 4:3 TV connected
with the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal or the HDMI AV
OUT terminal, it will be stretched vertically. Adjust by the aspect
ratio setting on the TV. If you cannot make the adjustment, set
the “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu to “576p/480p”
and “HDMI Video Format” to “576p/480p”. (> 93, 94)
¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
– If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in
the Setup menu. (> 90)
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same
aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the
“Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (> 90)
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer
to your television’s operating instructions.
There is a lot of after-image when playing video.
¾ Set “HD optimizer” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 82)
When playing DVD-Video using progressive
output, one part of the picture momentarily
appears to be doubled up.
¾ This problem is caused by the editing method or material used
on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlaced
output.
If outputting from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal, set
“Component Resolution” to “576i/480i” in the Setup menu.
(> 94)
There is no apparent change in picture quality
when adjusted with the Picture menu in the onscreen menus.
¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
The images from this unit do not appear on the
television.
Picture is distorted.
¾ Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal,
the VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals
or HDMI terminal on this unit. (> 17, 100)
¾ Make sure that the television’s input setting is correct.
¾ When “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu is set to
“576p/480p” or “720p”, but the connected television is not
progressive compatible, press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds to
cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used
by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and
[< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The
system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 93)
¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that
matches with this unit’s TV system.
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
Sound
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio type.
¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.
Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected
one. (> 17, 91, 100–103)
¾ Check if TV is muted.
¾ Check if amplifier is muted.
¾ Sound is not output while fast-forwarding during chasing
playback and simultaneous record and playback.
¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (> 40)
¾ Turn the “Sound Effects” in the Sound menu to “Off” in the
following cases. (> 82)
– When using discs that do not have surround sound effects
such as Karaoke discs.
– When playing bilingual broadcast titles.
¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
¾ Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is
output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT terminal.
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,
set “HDMI Audio Output” to “On” in the Setup menu. (> 93)
¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be
distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ When “BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “On”, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, and DTS-HD are converted to 48 kHz
Dolby Digital and output. In this case, set the “BD-Video
Secondary Audio” to “Off”. (> 91)
Cannot switch audio.
¾ You cannot switch the audio (L, R) in the following cases.
– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 92)
– When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default
setting is “On”). (> 90)
¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital audio cable, a
coaxial cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch the audio if
“Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD”, “DTS/DTS-HD” or “MPEG”
is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD”,
“DTS/DTS-HD” or “MPEG” to “PCM” or connect using audio
cables. (> 91, 101, 102)
¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of
how the disc was created.
Reference
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
RQT9434
109
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
110 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Troubleshooting guide
Operation
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.
¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be
operated even if you change the code. (> 99)
¾ The remote control and main unit are using different codes.
Change the code on the remote control. (> 95)
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated
number button at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (> 3)
¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s
remote control signal sensor during operation. (> 3)
¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that
may be subject to sunlight exposure.
¾ Software (firmware) is updating when “UPD / ” is displaying
on the unit’s display. Wait until the update is completed. (> 98)
¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again
after changing the batteries. (> 95)
¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after
changing the batteries. (> 99)
¾ The HOLD function is activated. (> 99)
The unit is on but cannot be operated.
¾ Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected
properly.
¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
¾ The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to
disappear.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on
the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one
minute, then reconnect it.
2 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still
cannot be operated, consult the dealer.
Cannot eject disc.
¾ The unit is recording.
¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and
hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about
5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the HOLD function is activated, above operation does not
work. Cancel the HOLD function. (> 99)
Cannot tune channels.
¾ Check the connections.
Startup is slow.
¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:
– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
– The clock is not set.
– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is
connected.
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the Setup menu. (> 95)
This is a normal phenomenon when using VIERA Link (HDAVI
Control 4 or later). For details please read the operating
instructions for the TV.
RQT9434
110
Recording, timer recording and
copying
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
¾ You can not record to the disc by pressing the [¥ REC] or timer
recording.
¾ BD-RE with a cartridge cannot be copied.
¾ [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] The disc is
unformatted. Format the disc. (> 85)
¾ The disc is protected with DVD Management or Blu-ray Disc
Management. (> 84)
¾ You cannot record/copy when there is not enough space or
when the number of titles has reached its limit. Delete
unwanted titles or use a new disc. (> 25, 49, 85)
¾ [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] In the following situations,
you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and
then copy. (> 25, 49, 85)
– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will
copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire disc,
HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode recording
is necessary).
– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be
copied has exceeded 999.
¾ You cannot copy on finalised discs. However, you can record
and copy again if you format BD-RE and DVD-RW.
¾ Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to
record onto or edit them if you either insert and remove the disc
or switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of
30 times.
¾ Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be
able to be copied to.
¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes
can be recorded/copied onto the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit
is not guaranteed.
¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected.
Cannot record from external equipment.
¾ Check that the connection is correct. (> 60, 101)
¾ The proper external input channel (AV2, AV3, or DV) is not
selected. Press [INPUT SELECT] to change.
¾ Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.
¾ Recording-restricted or copy-restricted programmes may not be
recorded.
Cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously.
¾ It cannot in following conditions.
– One satellite cable is connected to this unit.
– “One cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (> 18, 22, 87)
– Record 2 programmes from external input
– When performing high speed copying (1 programme can be
recorded to HDD)
– Recording from DV input, while recording to discs with
“Flexible Recording via AV input” function.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
111 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
The recording lacks the beginning or ending part
of the programme although the timer recording
was set on TV Guide.
午後４時２１分
The quality has dropped when the title in HDD is
copied to the disc.
¾ This occurs when the broadcast signals are not correct. We
recommend you set the timer again, allowing enough time for
the start and end time. (> 90)
¾ Titles in HD quality (titles recorded in DR mode or titles in
AVCHD) will be copied as SD quality when copied to [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW].
Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is
pressed.
The DV automatic recording function does not
work.
¾ When using the linked timer recording with external equipment,
press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display disappears.)
(> 59)
Timer recording does not work properly.
¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme
times overlap (
is displayed). Correct the programme.
(> 37)
¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer
icon “F” (red) in the timer recording list is grey.) (> 36)
¾ Set the clock. (> 95)
The timer programme remains even after
recording finishes.
¾ If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted,
check the connections and DV equipment settings. (> 60)
¾ You cannot start recording until the images from the DV
equipment appear on the television.
¾ Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes
on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive.
¾ Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may
not operate properly.
¾ The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV
tape. (> 61)
You cannot press [INPUT SELECT] to select
external input other than AV2.
¾ You cannot select external input other than AV2 when this unit
is in EXT LINK Standby mode or recording. Press [EXT LINK] to
cancel EXT LINK Standby mode. (> 59)
¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly. (> 35)
Recorded title cannot be played back anymore.
A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.
¾ If there is a power failure or the AC mains lead is disconnected
from the household mains socket while recording or editing, the
title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [-RW‹V›]
[+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee
regarding lost programmes or discs. (> 85, 90)
¾ If you use Auto Renewal Recording, the old title will be deleted
after the new title is recorded. (> 36)
Cannot copy to a disc using the high speed
mode.
¾ High speed copying cannot be performed depending on the
disc or title that is being copied. Refer to “When is high speed
copy not possible?” for details. (> 54)
When copying, it takes a long time even when
high speed mode is selected.
¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if
the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum
speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.
¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours
when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not
compatible with EP (8 hours) mode recording.
An unusually loud sound is coming from the
rotating disc.
¾ There are some titles that are copyright protected (Copying is
prohibited) for which the playback is disabled after a
predetermined time. (> 31)
Play
Play fails to start even when [1] (PLAY) is
pressed.
Play starts but then stops immediately.
¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 15)
¾ The disc is dirty, scratched or marked. (> 15)
¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
(> 10)
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to have a top menu on the
equipment used for recording.
¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8 hours) mode, play
may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with
DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6 hours) mode. (> 90)
¾ You cannot playback while executing the “Flexible Recording
via AV input” or when recording from the DV input.
¾ If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you
purchased it. (DivX)
¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages
are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
¾ Set “Play Video ( AVCHD ) on BD-RE / BD-R” to “On” for the
disc that has high definition video (AVCHD) recorded by the
Panasonic’s video camera, etc. and other video format such as
those recorded on this unit. (> 89)
Reference
¾ When recording or high speed copying to a disc, the sound of
the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is not
a problem.
¾ If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
( Silent )” in “BD / DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the
Setup menu. (> 90)
RQT9434
111
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
112 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Troubleshooting guide
Audio and video momentarily pause.
It takes time before play starts.
¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.
¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles
on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the
unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in
the same way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching
layers. (> 40)
¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
BD-Video or DVD-Video is not played.
¾ You have set a ratings level to limit BD-Video or DVD-Video
play. Change this setting. (> 89)
¾ Ensure the disc is for the correct BD-Video region code or DVDVideo region number, and is not defective. (> Cover)
¾ [BD-V] You cannot playback while recording from external
equipment.
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be
selected.
¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.
¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the
soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus
to make changes. (> 21)
No subtitles.
¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
¾ Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitles” on the on-screen menu to
“On”. (> 81)
Angle cannot be changed.
¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different
angles are recorded.
Picture stops.
¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX).
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI
cable)
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you
may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the
picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the
beginning of the title.
Edit
The available recording time doesn’t increase
even after deleting titles on the disc.
¾ Available space on BD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, or +R DL
does not increase even after deleting previous titles.
¾ Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW
increases when you delete the last title.
Cannot edit.
¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available
space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 25)
Cannot format.
¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
(> 15)
¾ Disc may be defective or of poor quality.
¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in
this unit. (> 10)
You have forgotten your ratings PIN.
You want to cancel the ratings level.
Cannot create chapters.
Cannot mark the start point or the end point
during “Partial Delete” operation.
¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc
tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the BD drive,
then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit
at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on
the unit’s display).
¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when
you turn it off or remove the disc.
¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.
¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You
cannot set an end point before a start point.
Image for the Quick View is not smooth.
Cannot delete chapters.
¾ Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR, HG,
HX, HE, HL mode titles or [BD-V] [AVCHD].
¾ This function does not work when recording is in XP or FR
mode.
¾ [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] When the chapter is too short to
delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.
(> 51)
Cannot create a playlist.
The resume play function does not work.
¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when
– open the disc tray.
– [SD] [CD] [USB] turn off the power.
([HDD] will not be cancelled)
¾ This function does not work for Some BD-Video disc that
contains BD-J.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.
Slow-motion playback does not go reverse.
Reverse frame-by-frame does not work properly.
¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings
are different from the title recorded on the disc. (> 93)
¾ Slow-motion playback in reverse does not work for [BD-V]
[AVCHD].
¾ [BD-V] [AVCHD] Reverse frame-by-frame cannot be done.
¾ Frame-by-frame backward for titles that have copied the
AVCHD will be reversed in 10 frame units.
¾ Slow-motion and frame-by-frame do not work with the title
recorded from radio service.
RQT9434
112
¾ Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.
Still pictures
Cannot display Picture View screen.
¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
Cannot edit or format a card.
¾ Release the card’s protection setting. (> 11)
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
113 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
The contents of the card cannot be read.
¾ Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this
does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
¾ The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents
on the card may be damaged.) (> 11)
¾ This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD
Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as
SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.
¾ The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that
are not compatible with this unit. (> 117)
¾ You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to
2 GB and SDHC Memory Cards with capacities from 4 GB to
32 GB.
Copying, deleting and setting protection takes a
long time.
¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take
a few hours.
¾ When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a
long time. Format the disc or card. (> 85)
Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.
午後４時２１分
TV Guide
The TV Guide System does not receive any data.
¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 95)
¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the
TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.
The empty field is displayed for some or all
stations.
¾ Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.
¾ Programme the Timer recording manually. (> 35)
The TV Guide information is not displayed
properly.
¾ There was a programme change, or TV Guide information from
a broadband cast station was possibly not correctly transmitted.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV
Guide system provider or station provider.
The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive
JPEG, etc., may not play back. (> 116)
¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to
the interruption.
¾ The programme information may be incomplete.
Music
The TV Guide data is not updated.
¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly. (> 95)
Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.
¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS
restrictions, they will not be copied.
¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.
Title of the newly released CD cannot be
acquired.
¾ Title cannot be acquired if the title is not registered in the built-in
Gracenote R database. Connection to the network is necessary
to acquire title for the newly released CD. (> 103)
Digital broadcast
Digital broadcasts cannot be received.
¾ The dish may not be pointing in the direction of the satellite, or
the direction of the dish may have changed due to strong winds
or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial
installer.
¾ Reception may be disturbed in bad weather.
¾ To record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional Access
Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is required.
TV reception worsens after connecting the unit.
ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not completely displayed.
¾ Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this
unit.
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between
the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal
booster, available from electronics retailers.
USB
The digital channel information does not appear.
The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen
Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 92)
¾ The digital satellite channel information will not appear during
playback.
¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert
again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the
unit again.
¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 15)
¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not
compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory
may be damaged.) (> 11)
¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file
extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 117)
¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a
USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 11)
¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB
memory may not be recognized by this unit.
¾ You can use USB memories with capacities up to 128 GB.
USB memory cannot be operated.
Reference
¾ Turn the power of this unit off once, and turn it back on. If it
cannot be operated after that, set “VIERA Link” to “Off” and turn
the power of this unit off again, and turn it back on. (> 93)
RQT9434
113
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
114 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Troubleshooting guide
Picture regularly breaks up on some channels.
“No signal” message is displayed.
¾ Check aerial connection.
¾ Check that the satellite dish and satellite cable are designed for
DVB.
¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength”
are displayed in red or constantly changing, check aerial. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer. (> 88)
¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household
appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause
picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality
quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and
antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
¾ Check the reception capacity of the satellite dish. The dish must
be large enough for good reception. There must not be any
hindrances in the way which could impair reception, e.g. twigs,
leaves, snow.
¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “Manual Tuning” in the Setup
menu. (> 88)
¾ The receiver (LNB) of the satellite dish must be suitable for
digital reception.
Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or
all channels.
¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant
lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may
cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort
momentarily.
¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical
appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy”
ignition system.
¾ The reception capacity of the satellite dish is not sufficient.
To reset this unit
To return all the settings other than the main ones
to the factory preset
¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the
settings except for the ratings level and ratings PIN, etc. return
to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled. (> 95)
¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the
settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, language
settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings PIN,
remote control code, network settings, etc. return to the factory
presets. (> 95)
¾ Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
Auto Setup screen appears. All the settings except for the
ratings level, ratings PIN and clock settings, etc. return to the
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.
To reset the ratings level settings
¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
the BD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the
safety devices being activated
¾ Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 3 seconds. (The
settings remain.)
Network
I can’t connect to the network.
After the Auto-setup, there aren’t any stations in
the station list.
¾ “Shipping Condition” was performed or the unit was in the
delivery status. The Auto-setup was then started and
interrupted.
Do an Auto-setup again and let it continue right through to the
end. The data is only saved after this has been completed.
VIERA Link
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is
displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit
is set to On.
¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 93)
¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
¾ Some functions may not work if depending on the version of
“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports
“HDAVI Control 4” functions.
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was
changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was
removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”
may not work.
In this case, perform the following operations.
1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the
power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”
function to off, and then set to on again. (For more
information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,
and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI
Control” is working.
The Control Panel does not appear.
¾ The Control Panel is only displayed when connected to a TV
with “HDAVI Control 2” or later function. (> 77)
The operation on this unit (music playback etc.)
is interrupted.
¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press
buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA
Link functions.
RQT9434
114
¾ Has the LAN cable become unplugged? Check that the LAN
cable is properly connected. (> 103)
¾ Have you plugged in a modular cable for use with a telephone
into the LAN terminal on this unit? Connect with a straight LAN
cable. (> 103)
¾ Is the power for the modem or broadband router turned on?
Turn the power on for each device.
¾ Is there a mistake in the network settings? Follow any
instructions you may have received from your ISP (Internet
Service Provider) and make changes to the settings.
¾ Are the broadband router settings correct? Read the operating
instructions for the broadband router.
¾ Is the broadband router and/or modem correctly connected?
Check the operating instructions for each device and connect
accordingly.
While using my PC, I cannot connect to the
network.
¾ Does your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or service contract
prevent multiple terminals connecting at the same time? Check
the content of your contract.
Other
After performing an update, you can no longer
receive broadcasts.
¾ Depending on the content of the update, some settings may
have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.
Cannot set “On” in “BD-Video 24p Output”.
¾ Only when the unit is connected to the HDMI terminal of a TV
supporting 24p you can select “On”. In some cases where the
unit is connected to a TV via an amplifier/receiver through the
HDMI terminals, you may not be able to select “On”. In this
case, connect the unit to a TV through the HDMI terminal and
connect it to the amplifier/receiver through any terminal other
than HDMI.
Pause Live TV stops.
¾ Pause Live TV from AV1, AV2 or AV3 input stops when a timer
recording from external input started.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
115 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Specifications
Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format
Blu-ray Disc Recordable Format
DVD Video Recording format
DVD-Video format
DVD-Video format
DVD-Video format
Recordable discs
BD-RE (SL/DL):
1-2X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
BD-R (SL/DL):
1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2),
1-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
1-2X SPEED LTH type (Ver. 1.2)
DVD-RAM:
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
DVD-R (SL):
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
DVD-R (DL):
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
DVD-RW:
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R (SL):
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
+R (DL):
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
+RW:
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
Playable discs
BD-RE (SL/DL):
BD-R (SL/DL):
BD-RE Ver. 2.1 conforming, JPEG
BD-R LTH TYPE Ver. 1.2 conforming,
BD-R Ver. 1.3 conforming
BD-Video
DVD-RAM§1: DVD Video Recording format, AVCHD format, JPEG
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format§2, AVCHD format§2, MP3§2, 3, JPEG§2, 3,
DivX§2, 3
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format§2, AVCHD format§2,
MP3§2, 3, JPEG§2, 3, DivX§2, 3
DVD-RW:
DVD-Video format§2, DVD Video Recording format,
AVCHD format§2
+R§2, +R DL (Double Layer)§2, +RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA)
CD-R/CD-RW:
CD-DA§2, MP3§2, 3, JPEG§2, 3, DivX§2, 3
Optical pick-up
System with 2 lens, 3 integration units
(405 nm wavelength for BDs,
661 nm wavelength for DVDs, 783 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave length:
CD
DVD
BD
Audio
Recording system:
Dolby Digital 2ch (XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode),
Linear PCM (XP mode),
Dolby Digital Max 5.1ch (DVB-S/S2) (DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode)
Dolby Digital Plus Max 5.1ch (DVB-S/S2) (DR mode)
MPEG 2ch (DR mode)
Audio in:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)
Input level:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Input impedance:
More than 10 k≠
Audio out:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Output level:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Output impedance:
Less than 1 k≠
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
Coaxial terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
HDMI terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio)
HDMI Output
19 pin type A: 1 pc
HDMI™ (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM, High Bit Rate Audio)
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
Internal HDD capacity
[BS850] 500 GB
[BS750] 250 GB
DV Input
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin: 1 pc
USB Port
Type A: 1 pc
SD Card Slot
1 pc
LAN (Ethernet) Port
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
CI (Common Interface) Slot
EN 50221 Standard,
2 slot Type I and II PC Card (5 V only) rear side
Television system
Tuner System:
DVB-S/S2
Antenna receive frequency:
950 MHz to 2150 MHz
Input level:
–65 dBm to –25 dBm
Input impedance:
Nominal 75 ≠
Demodulation:
QPSK, 8PSK
LNB input:
F shape terminal female, power supply 13 V/18 V
max. 400 mA
LNB output:
Not provided
RF converter output:
Not provided
DiSEqC:
Version 1.0 or Tone burst A/B, 22 kHz 0.65 Vp-p
Others
Region code:
783 nm wave length
661 nm wave length
405 nm wave length
Laser power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
Video
Video system:
PAL/NTSC
Recording system:
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)/MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB in (PAL):
AV2 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Component video output
(PAL 576i/576p/720p/1080i, NTSC 480i/480p/720p/1080i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
DVD: #2
BD: Region B
5 oC to 40 oC
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
[BS850] Approx. 65 W
[BS750] Approx. 64 W
Dimensions (WkHkD):
[BS850]
430 mmk66 mmk239 mm (excluding the projecting parts)
430 mmk66 mmk259 mm (including the projecting parts)
[BS750]
430 mmk59 mmk239 mm (excluding the projecting parts)
430 mmk59 mmk259 mm (including the projecting parts)
Mass:
[BS850] Approx. 3.3 kg
[BS750] Approx. 3.2 kg
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)
Approx. 7 W (“Power Save” is set to “Off”)
Reference
Recording system
BD-RE (SL/DL):
BD-R (SL/DL):
DVD-RAM:
DVD-R:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-RW:
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
RQT9434
115
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
116 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Specifications
SD Card
Slot:
Compatible media:
Format:
JPEG
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
SD Memory Card§4, SDHC Memory Card
FAT12, FAT16§5 (In case of SD Memory Card)
FAT32§5 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)
Data that can be played:
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
[SD]
File format
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera
File system)§10
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Number of
pixels
Between 34k34 and 8192k8192 pixels
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
§6
JPEG, SD (Standard Definition)-Video ,
HD (High Definition)-Video
USB device
USB standard:
USB 2.0 High Speed
Format:
FAT16, FAT32
Data that can be played:
MP3, JPEG, DivX,
SD (Standard Definition)-Video§7, HD (High Definition)-Video§8
DivX
Playable
media
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
File format
DivX
≥Files must have the
extension “.DIVX”,
“.divx”, “.AVI” or
“.avi”.
Number of
folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable : 300
folders
(including the root folder)
Number of
files
Maximum number of files recognizable: 200 files
Support
version
Playable
media
Thawing Time Approx. 2 sec. in case of SD card (8.1 M pixels,
JPEG)
Number of
folders
[CD] Maximum number of folders recognizable: 99
folders (including the root folder)
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [USB] [SD]
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300
folders (including the root folder)
Number of
files
[CD] Maximum number of files recognizable: 999
files
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [USB] [SD] Maximum number of
files recognizable: 3000 files
[HDD] [BD-RE] Maximum number of files
recognizable: 9999 files
Not supported
MOTION
JPEG
PROGRESSIVE
JPEG
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not
supported. DivX, DivX Certified, and associated
logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used
under license.
≥It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
≥When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
Video
– Number of stream: Up to 1
– Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
– Picture size: 32k32 to 720k576
– FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
– Number of stream: Up to 8
– Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital
– Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG
multi is 2 ch conversion.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders and some files (tracks) may not display or
be playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders may not play in the order you numbered them.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
SD (Standard Definition)-Video
Playable
media
[SD]§6 [USB]§7
Codec
MPEG2
File Format
SD-Video format§9 used on Standard Definition
Camera (Panasonic and some other's)
HD (High Definition)-Video
Playable
media
[SD] [USB]§8
Codec
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
File Format
AVCHD format conforming
MP3
Playable
media
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
File format
MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Number of
folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable (except
for HDD): 300 folders (including the root folder)
Number of
files (tracks)
Maximum number of files recognizable (except for
HDD): 3000 files
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling
frequency
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz
ID3 tags
compatible
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
RQT9434
116
[Note]
≥Specifications are subject to change without notice.
≥Useable capacity will be less. (SD card)
§1
Remove the disc from cartridge case (TYPE1 cannot be used).
§2
Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
§3
ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats) and Joliet
This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-R DL).
This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
§4
Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be
inserted.)
§5 Long file name is unsupported.
§6
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from SD
card to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVDRAM disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.
§7 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB
device to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVDRAM disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.
§8 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB
device to HDD, BD-RE (SL/DL) or BD-R (SL/DL) disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD, BD-RE
(SL/DL) or BD-R (SL/DL) disc is completed, the playback
becomes possible.
§9 SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile
§10 Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
117 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the method of
writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Structure of MP3, still picture or DivX folders
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you want to play them.
MP3
Files inside a folder are displayed in the order they were updated or
taken.
Still picture
Root
001
DivX
Root
001 Folder
Root
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
002 Folder
002 Folder
P0000003.divx
P0000004.divx
P0000005.divx
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
002 Folder
003 Folder
P0000001.divx
P0000002.divx
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
(file=track)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 Folder
003 Folder
P0000006.divx
P0000007.divx
P0000008.divx
P0000009.divx
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004 Folder
Order of play
Order of play
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
004 Folder
Order of play
P0000010.divx
P0000011.divx
P0000012.divx
[SD]
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters
[BD-RE] [RAM]
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters
Root
Card
XXXX.JPG
JPEG
DCIM
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXXX
(Picture folder)
XXXX.JPG
XXXX.JPG
XXXXX
XXXX.JPG
Any folder with JPEG files
e.g.,
001
P0000001.JPG
P0000002.JPG
SD_VIDEO
§1
Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these
folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other
equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may
not be able to play or edit the data.
(MPEG2 folder)
PRG
MOV.MOD
MOV.MOI
PRG.PGI
MGR_INFO
(MPEG2 information folder)
PRIVATE
AVCHD
(AVCHD folder)
Reference
1
DCIM
RQT9434
117
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
118 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Glossary
AVCHD
AVCHD is a new format (standard) for high definition video cameras
that can be used to record and play high-resolution HD images.
BD-J
Some BD-Video discs contain Java applications, and these
applications are called BD-J. You can enjoy various interactive
features in addition to playing normal video.
Bitstream
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
BONUSVIEW
With the new play function of the BD-Video, you can enjoy the
secondary video recorded on the disc, in addition to the main movie.
CI (Common Interface)
Common Interface is a defined standard, to enable the addition of a
CAM (Conditional Access Module) in a Digital TV/Recorder.
CI Plus
CI Plus is a technical specification that adds additional security and
features to the proven DVB Common Interface Standard that will
allow CI Plus compatible consumer electronics devices, such as
Integrated Digital Televisions and Set Top Boxes, access to a wide
range of Pay TV Services via a Plug-in CI Plus CAM wherever the CI
Plus Technology is supported by the local Pay TV Provider.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on discs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology
that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when
connected to a compatible TV.
You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with
smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.
[A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be
reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep
Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the
connected TV.]
DiSEqC (Digital Satellite Equipment Control)
Digital Satellite Equipment Control is a control system for selecting
several LNBs at one input.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality
that maintains a relatively small file size.
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)
DLNA is a standard that makes DLNA Certified digital electronics
easier and more convenient to use on a home network.
DNS Server
A server which acts like a telephone directory and translates Internet
domain names into IP addresses.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio.
Dolby Digital Plus
Multi-channel audio and higher audio quality is made possible using
Dolby Digital Plus. BD-Video supports up to 7.1 channel output.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a very high quality audio format that reproduces the
studio master audio. BD-Video supports up to 7.1 channel output.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into fewer channels.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
DTS-HD
DTS-HD is a high-quality, sophisticated audio format used in movie
theaters. Previous DTS Digital Surround-compatible equipment can
play DTS-HD as DTS Digital Surround audio. BD-Video supports up
to 7.1 channel output.
RQT9434
118
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
Film and video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video:
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).
Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or
animation.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can
finalise BD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL on this unit.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format BD-RE, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video
format), +RW, SD cards and the HDD or unused BD-R, +R and
+R DL on this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
Frame
Field
Field
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
Gateway
IP address of the electronic device providing Internet access.
Usually called a router IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.1)
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports highdefinition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
IP address
A set of numbers which distinguish each PC on the network when,
for example, connected to the Internet. When using a PC in a LAN to
access a PC or device that is not included in the LAN, the IP address
is called the local IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.10)
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
LAN (Local Area Network)
A group of linked devices in a company, school or home.
Indicates the boundaries of a particular network.
LNB (Low Noise Block - converter)
This is attached to the satellite dish, which will amplify the weak
signal that was received, lower the frequency, and input into the
tuner.
Local storage
This storage area is used as a destination for sub contents for
playing virtual packages on BD-Video.
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
119 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting.
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is an encoding method used for recording of
the high definition videos.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, BD-Video and DVD-Video are produced with the
intention that they be viewed on a widescreen television (16:9
aspect ratio), so images often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio)
televisions. Two styles of picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal
with this problem.
Pan & Scan:
The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
午後４時２１分
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.
1080p
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
24p
This is a progressive image recorded at a rate of 24 frames per
second.
720p
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
Progressive/Interlace
Interlace is a conventional image signal that displays the image in 2
phases by splitting the display into odd and even scans.
Progressive will display whole image in 1 scan. Therefore, it will give
high definition image without flickering compared with interlace.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Router
Distinguishes the IP address assigned to each device, such as the
PC, and relays the flow of data within the network.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the
quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels
you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time
(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,
etc.
Subnet mask
Enables efficient network use. A set of numbers which identify which
part of the IP address allocated to every device connected to the
router is the network portion.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
x.v.ColourTM
x.v.ColourTM is a name for devices that are compatible with the
xvYCC format, an international standard for expanded colour in
motion pictures, and that follow the rules for signal transmission.
You can enjoy vivid colours of wider colour ranges for a more
realistic picture when connected to a TV that supports the
x.v.ColourTM with HDMI cable.
Reference
Transponder
The signals of a broadcasting station are received by a transponder
on a satellite. The transponder converts them to frequencies and
sends them to satellite dishes near the ground. A transponder can
broadcast several TV and radio programmes or data in parallel.
RQT9434
119
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
120 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Safety precautions
Placement
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Foreign matter
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United
States and other countries.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535;
7,392,195; 7,272,567; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD,
DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential and the DTS logos are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC
in the United States and other countries.
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license
and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal and
non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in
compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard
(“AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and
non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video
provider licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is
granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional
information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.
See http://www.mpegla.com.
“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic
Corporation and Sony Corporation.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
“Blu-ray Disc” is trademark.
“BONUSVIEW” is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association.
“BD-LIVE” logo is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association.
DiSEqCTM is a trademark of EUTELSAT.
Plays DivX® video
DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under
license.
x.v.ColourTM is a trademark.
VIERA CASTTM is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
YouTube and Picasa are trademarks of Google, Inc.
RQT9434
120
121 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
The “CI Plus” Logo is a trademark of CI Plus LLP.
DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM are trademarks,
service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network
Alliance.
This product incorporates the following software:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic
Corporation,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic
Corporation,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License,
Version 2 (GPL v2),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public
License, Version 2.1 (LGPL v2.1) and/or,
(5) open sourced software other than the software licensed under
the GPL v2 and/or LGPL v2.1
For the software categorized as (3) and (4), please refer to the
terms and conditions of GPL v2 and LGPL v2.1, as the case may
be at
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html and
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
In addition, the software categorized as (3) and (4) are
copyrighted by several individuals. Please refer to the copyright
notice of those individuals at
http://www.am-linux.jp/dl/JPRCBW93
The GPL/LGPL software is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
At least three (3) years from delivery of products, Panasonic will
give to any third party who contact us at the contact information
provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of physically
performing source code distribution, a complete machinereadable copy of the corresponding source code covered under
GPL v2/LGPL v2.1.
Contact Information
cdrequest@am-linux.jp
Source code is also freely available to you and any other member
of the public via our website below.
http://www.am-linux.jp/dl/JPRCBW93
The recording and playback of content on this or any other
device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or
other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to
and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims
any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your
behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or
any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in
your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information
on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the
owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.
午後４時２１分
Gracenote® Corporate Description
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content delivery.
For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000–2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright ©
2000–2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one
or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
#6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote® End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS
BELOW.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the
“Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or
file identification and obtain music-related information, including name,
artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online
servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”)
and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT
TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease
any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied,
regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the
Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that
Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or
additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the
future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
Reference
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
RQT9434
121
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
122 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Index
Adjust the audio quality (Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Adjust the picture quality (Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Album (Music)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Album (Still picture)
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Audio
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
AVCHD
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
BD-Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
BONUSVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CAM (Conditional Access Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Channel
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 90
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
CI Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 19, 31, 98, 118
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 19, 94
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 101
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Digital Audio Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 102
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Set Top Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 100, 102
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
VIDEO terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Copy
HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 52–58
Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Deep Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Delete
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
All titles (Discs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
All titles (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
RQT9434
122
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Digital broadcast
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 28, 89
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Sub Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 28
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 28, 89
Update Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Discs
Disc Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
DiSEqC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Display
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 45, 116, 117, 118
DLNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 118
DR (Direct Recording mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
DR File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Edit
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 74
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 118
Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 118
FUNCTION MENU display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
HD Video
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
HDD
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Connecting with a receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Connecting with a television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 102
Settings (HDMI Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 90
HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 117, 118
Language
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 89
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 89
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 89
Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(Set Top Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
LNB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 118
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 119
123 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
MPEG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Music
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74
Play (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Play (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Play (Music on HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Name
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Network
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
DLNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 118
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
On-screen
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Playing back
BD-Video/DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Playlist
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 119
Properties
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Protection
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Ratings level
BD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
EXT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 35–38
Recording to discs from external equipment
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
午後４時２１分
SD card
Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Play (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Play (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SD Video
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Smart Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Software (firmware) Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Subtitle
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc (Disc menu) . . . . . . . . 81
Teletext
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Timer recording
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Manual Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Title
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 52–58
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 119
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 38
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Update Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB
Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
62
75
63
68
15
64
11
VIERA CASTTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 102
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 77
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
x.v.ColourTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
2 programmes simultaneous recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 34
Reference
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
RQT9434
1 2 3
DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book
124 ページ
２０１０年１月１４日
木曜日
午後４時２１分
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products
and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points,
in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential
negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your
waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or
dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the
Directive for the chemical involved.
Cd
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
≥DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE
PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
≥USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
≥DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains,
disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION!
≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY
OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.
≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
≥DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
≥DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
(Inside of product)
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
EU
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
© Panasonic Corporation 2010
p
RQT9434-L
F0110MD0
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : Yes Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39 Modify Date : 2010:02:09 12:59:15-08:00 Create Date : 2010:01:19 16:40:14+09:00 Metadata Date : 2010:02:09 12:59:15-08:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:5a9e7fb1-113a-479a-a1da-dfc62c61244f Instance ID : uuid:d96a1bcd-a97a-43d3-8da0-1dffec9dd646 Page Count : 124 Page Layout : SinglePageEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools